wansuite 5160/5130 reference manual - verilink · viii wansuite 5160/5130 frame relay statistics...

263
WANsuite ® 5160/5130 Reference Manual August 2002 34-00298.M

Upload: nguyenduong

Post on 21-Jul-2018

228 views

Category:

Documents


2 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

i

WANsuite® 5160/5130Reference Manual

August 200234-00298.M

Page 2: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Copyright Notice Copyright © 2002 Verilink Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may bereproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any languagein any form by any means without the written permission of Verilink.

Manual Reorder # 34-00298.M

August 2002

Trademarks Verilink® and WANsuite® are registered trademarks of the Verilink Corporation. FrameStart™,WANsight™, and ServiceAware™ are trademarks of the Verilink Corporation.

All other brand and product names used herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of theirrespective manufacturers.

Documentation Disclaimer

This document does not create any express or implied warranty about Verilink or about its prod-ucts or services. Verilink’s sole warranty is contained in its product warranty. The end-user doc-umentation is shipped with Verilink’s products and constitutes the sole specifications referred toin the product warranty. Verilink has made reasonable efforts to verify that the information con-tained herein is accurate, but Verilink assumes no responsibility for its use or for any infringe-ment of patents or other rights of third parties that may result. The customer is solelyresponsible for verifying the suitability of Verilink’s products for its use. Specifications are sub-ject to change without notice.

Warranty Verilink's product warranty is included at the back of this document.

FCC Requirements This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protectionagainst harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Thisequipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and usedin accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communica-tions. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference inwhich case the user is required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device mustalso accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: For use only with a certified Class 2 power supply. See Power Source in Appendix A, Specifications.

WARNING: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the rear or bottom of the unit is alabel that contains the FCC registration number and other information. If requested, provide thisinformation to the telephone company.

1 All direct connections to the network lines must be made using standard plugs and jacks (compliant with Part 68). The table below presents a list of applicable registration jack USOCs, facility interface codes (FICs), and service order codes (SOCs). These are required when ordering service from the telco.

2 If the unit appears to be malfunctioning, it should be disconnected from the network lines until the source of trouble is determined to be your equipment or the telephone line. If your equipment needs repair, it should not be reconnected until it is repaired.

Port ID REN/SOC FIC USOC

1.544 Mbps SF1.544 Mbps SF, B8ZS1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF, B8ZS

6.0F 04DU9-BN 04DU9-DN 04DU9-1KN04DU9-1SN

RJ-48C jack

ii W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 3: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

3 The unit has been designed to prevent harm to the network. If the telephone company finds that the equipment is exceeding tolerable parameters, it can temporarily disconnect service. In this case, the telephone company will give you advance notice, if possible.

4 No customer is authorized to repair this equipment, regardless of warranty status.

5 If the telephone company alters its equipment in a manner that will affect the use of this device, it must give you warning so that you have the opportunity for uninterrupted service. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

6 If the equipment malfunctions, all repairs should be performed by our company or an authorized agent. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to our company or to one of our authorized agents.

Canadian Emissions Requirements

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digitalapparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Commu-nications.

Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites appli-cables aux appareils numériques (de la class A) prescrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillageradioélectrique edicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.

Safety Precautions When handling this equipment, follow these basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of elec-tric shock and injury:

• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product and in the manual.

• Unplug the hardware from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol clean-ers. Use a slightly damp cloth for cleaning.

• Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. It may fall, causing serious damage tothe product.

• Slots in the unit are provided for ventilation to protect it from overheating. These openings must notbe blocked or covered. Never place this product near a radiator or heat register.

• This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking labeland manual. If you are unsure of the type of power supply you are using, consult your dealer or localpower company.

• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord interfereswith the free movement of people.

• Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in fire or electric shock.

• Never push objects of any kind into the unit. They may touch dangerous voltage points or short outparts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on this equipment.

• Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under thefollowing conditions:

• When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

• If liquid has been spilled into the product.

• If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

• If the product has been dropped or if the housing has been damaged.

iii

Page 4: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

iv W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 5: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Table of Contents

PrefaceAbout this Manual ................................................................................................................................ xi

Manual Organization ...................................................................................................................... xiTypographic Conventions ............................................................................................................. xii

Customer Service and Technical Support ............................................................................................ xiiSupport from Your Network Supplier ........................................................................................... xiiSupport from Verilink ................................................................................................................... xii

Telephone .............................................................................................................................. xiiiE-mail .................................................................................................................................... xiiiInternet ................................................................................................................................... xiii

Returning a Unit to Verilink ............................................................................................................... xiii

Chapter 1 About the WANsuite 5160/5130Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Features of the WANsuite 5160/5130 ................................................................................................ 1-3Performance ................................................................................................................................. 1-3SNMP Management ..................................................................................................................... 1-3Intelligent WAN Access Architecture ......................................................................................... 1-3Optional Advanced Network Management .................................................................................. 1-4

About FrameStart Technology ........................................................................................................... 1-4

WANsuite 5160/5130 Overview and Advantages .............................................................................. 1-5

Features Summary .............................................................................................................................. 1-5

Front Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 1-7

Rear Panel Connections .................................................................................................................... 1-10Supervisory Port ......................................................................................................................... 1-1010/100 Ethernet .......................................................................................................................... 1-11

Ethernet LED Indicators ...................................................................................................... 1-11Serial Interface(s) ....................................................................................................................... 1-11Network Interfaces ..................................................................................................................... 1-12Power Connection ...................................................................................................................... 1-12

Power Failure ....................................................................................................................... 1-13

Chapter 2 InstallationUnpacking and Inspection .................................................................................................................. 2-1

Supplied Materials .............................................................................................................................. 2-1

Installation Wizard .............................................................................................................................. 2-2

v

Page 6: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Chapter 3 Web Server InterfaceWeb Server Access ............................................................................................................................. 3-1

Layout of Interface Screens ......................................................................................................... 3-2

Unit Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Interfaces ............................................................................................................................................. 3-5Network Screens .......................................................................................................................... 3-5

Error Status and Alarm Thresholds Table ............................................................................. 3-8Serial Screens ............................................................................................................................. 3-11

Current Pin Status ................................................................................................................ 3-15DTR Alarm Control and Status Table ................................................................................. 3-15

10/100 Ethernet Screen (IP Service Details) .............................................................................. 3-15Supervisory Screen ..................................................................................................................... 3-18

Current Pin Status ................................................................................................................ 3-19DTR Alarm Control and Status Table ................................................................................. 3-19

Services Screen ................................................................................................................................. 3-19Data Line Monitor Configuration Table .................................................................................... 3-20Adding a Service ........................................................................................................................ 3-21Service Details Screen ................................................................................................................ 3-22

Interface Details Button ....................................................................................................... 3-23Type Details Button ............................................................................................................. 3-23Delete Service Button .......................................................................................................... 3-23

DS0 Monitor Details Screen (5160 Only) .................................................................................. 3-24DS0 Status and Alarm Table ............................................................................................... 3-25

Frame Relay Service Details Screen .......................................................................................... 3-27Status and Alarms Table ...................................................................................................... 3-31Frame Relay Port Statistics Screen ...................................................................................... 3-32

SCADA Details Screen .............................................................................................................. 3-34PPP Service Details Screen ........................................................................................................ 3-36

Parameters To Negotiate ..................................................................................................... 3-38PPP Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 3-38PAP Table ............................................................................................................................ 3-40CHAP Table ........................................................................................................................ 3-41

IP Service Details Screen ........................................................................................................... 3-41

Applications ...................................................................................................................................... 3-42Endpoint Table Screen ............................................................................................................... 3-42

Endpoint Details Screen ...................................................................................................... 3-42Endpoint Service Details Screen ......................................................................................... 3-45DLCI Details Screen ............................................................................................................ 3-45

Service Aware Screen ................................................................................................................ 3-50Rule Details Screen ............................................................................................................. 3-51Traffic Meter Statistics Screen ............................................................................................ 3-53

SNMP Details Screen ................................................................................................................. 3-54Diagnostics Screen ..................................................................................................................... 3-55

Test Details Screens ............................................................................................................. 3-55Trap Log Screen ......................................................................................................................... 3-59Top Talkers ................................................................................................................................ 3-60IP Gateway Details Screen ......................................................................................................... 3-61

RIP Parameters .................................................................................................................... 3-62

vi W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 7: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

OSPF Parameters ................................................................................................................. 3-62Circuit Table Screen ............................................................................................................ 3-63Static Routes Screen ............................................................................................................ 3-65Static ARP Table Screen ..................................................................................................... 3-68Trusted Neighbor Table Screen ........................................................................................... 3-70Area Table Screen ............................................................................................................... 3-71Virtual Link Table Screen ................................................................................................... 3-73

TCP Server ................................................................................................................................. 3-74TCP Server Details Screen .................................................................................................. 3-74

Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................... 3-76NAT Details Screen ............................................................................................................. 3-77

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) ........................................................................ 3-82DHCP Server Details Screen ............................................................................................... 3-83

Bridge ......................................................................................................................................... 3-87Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) ..................................................................................... 3-91Encryption .................................................................................................................................. 3-91

Utilities ............................................................................................................................................. 3-92Upload/Save ............................................................................................................................... 3-92Password .................................................................................................................................... 3-93Log Out ...................................................................................................................................... 3-94In-band Management ................................................................................................................. 3-94

Use of Connected Local Router ........................................................................................... 3-94Use of Local WANsuite 5160/5130 as a Gateway .............................................................. 3-95

Chapter 4 VT100 InterfaceIntroduction ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1

Accessing the VT100 Interface .................................................................................................... 4-1Screen Components ...................................................................................................................... 4-1Cursor Controls ............................................................................................................................ 4-2Field Types ................................................................................................................................... 4-2Menu Structure ............................................................................................................................. 4-3

System Screen ..................................................................................................................................... 4-4Maintenance Reset ....................................................................................................................... 4-5Save and Restart ........................................................................................................................... 4-6

Interfaces Screen ................................................................................................................................. 4-6Network Screens .......................................................................................................................... 4-7

Error Status and Alarm Thresholds Table ........................................................................... 4-10Performance Screens ........................................................................................................... 4-11

Serial Screens ............................................................................................................................. 4-1310/100 Ethernet (IP Details) Screen ........................................................................................... 4-17Supervisory Configuration Screen ............................................................................................. 4-18

Service Table Screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-20Data Line Monitor Configuration Table .................................................................................... 4-20

Service Details Screen ......................................................................................................... 4-23DS0 Monitor Details Screen (5160 Only) .................................................................................. 4-24

DS0 Status and Alarm Table ............................................................................................... 4-24Frame Relay Service Details Screen .......................................................................................... 4-26

vii

Page 8: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Frame Relay Statistics Screen ............................................................................................. 4-31PPP Service Details Screen ........................................................................................................ 4-33

Parameters to Negotiate ....................................................................................................... 4-34PPP Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 4-35PAP Table ............................................................................................................................ 4-36CHAP Table and Details Screens ........................................................................................ 4-37

SCADA Service Details Screen ................................................................................................. 4-38IP Service Details Screen ........................................................................................................... 4-40

Applications ...................................................................................................................................... 4-40Endpoint Table Screen ............................................................................................................... 4-40

Endpoint Details Screen ...................................................................................................... 4-41Endpoint Service Details Screen ......................................................................................... 4-44DLCI Details Screen ............................................................................................................ 4-44DLCI Table Screen .............................................................................................................. 4-48

Service Aware Screen ................................................................................................................ 4-49Rule Configuration Screen .................................................................................................. 4-50Traffic Meter Statistics Screen ............................................................................................ 4-51

SNMP Details Screen ................................................................................................................. 4-52Diagnostics Screen ..................................................................................................................... 4-53

Test Details Screens ............................................................................................................. 4-53Trap Log Screen ......................................................................................................................... 4-57Top Talkers Screen .................................................................................................................... 4-57IP Gateway Screen ..................................................................................................................... 4-58

RIP Parameters .................................................................................................................... 4-59OSPF Parameters ................................................................................................................. 4-59Circuit Table Screen ............................................................................................................ 4-60Static Route Table Screen .................................................................................................... 4-62Static ARP Table Screen ..................................................................................................... 4-65Trusted Neighbors Screen ................................................................................................... 4-66Area Table Screen ............................................................................................................... 4-67Virtual Link Table Screen ................................................................................................... 4-69

TCP Server ................................................................................................................................. 4-71TCP Server Screen ............................................................................................................... 4-71

Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................... 4-73NAT Details Screen ............................................................................................................. 4-74

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) ........................................................................ 4-80DHCP Server Details Screen ............................................................................................... 4-81

Bridge ......................................................................................................................................... 4-84Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) ..................................................................................... 4-88Encryption .................................................................................................................................. 4-89

Chapter 5 Front Panel LCD InterfaceIntroduction ......................................................................................................................................... 5-1

Description of Front Panel ........................................................................................................... 5-1

LCD Front Panel Operation ................................................................................................................ 5-3Password ...................................................................................................................................... 5-3Interface Conventions .................................................................................................................. 5-4

Menu Title ............................................................................................................................. 5-4

viii W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 9: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Menu Element ........................................................................................................................ 5-4Information Element .............................................................................................................. 5-5Cursor .................................................................................................................................... 5-5

Main Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 5-5Alarms Menu ................................................................................................................................ 5-5

Network 1 and Network 2 (5160) or Network (5130) Alarm Status Menu .......................... 5-6DTR Alarm ............................................................................................................................ 5-8Reset Timer ............................................................................................................................ 5-8Reset Alarms .......................................................................................................................... 5-8

Performance Menu ....................................................................................................................... 5-8Maintenance Menu ....................................................................................................................... 5-9

Network Maintenance Menu ................................................................................................. 5-9Serial Maintenance Menu .................................................................................................... 5-11

Configuration Menu ................................................................................................................... 5-12TCP/IP Configuration Menu ............................................................................................... 5-12Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Configuration Menu ................................................ 5-13Network 2 Configuration Menu (5160 Only) ...................................................................... 5-15Serial 1 and Serial 2 (5160) or Serial (5130) Configuration Menus ................................... 5-17Supervisory Configuration Menu ........................................................................................ 5-21

Utilities Menu ............................................................................................................................. 5-22Maintenance Reset ............................................................................................................... 5-22Set Password ........................................................................................................................ 5-22LCD E/D .............................................................................................................................. 5-23

Log Out Menu ............................................................................................................................ 5-23

Appendix A SpecificationsNetwork 1 (or Network) Interface ..................................................................................................... A-1

Network 2 Interface (5160 Only) ...................................................................................................... A-1

Serial Interface(s) ............................................................................................................................... A-2

IP Gateway ......................................................................................................................................... A-210/100 Ethernet (IP Gateway or Management) .................................................................... A-2

Management Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... A-210/100 Ethernet (Management or IP Gateway) .................................................................... A-2Supervisory Port ................................................................................................................... A-2

Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................ A-2

Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ A-3

Power ................................................................................................................................................. A-3

Mechanical ......................................................................................................................................... A-3

Environmental .................................................................................................................................... A-3

Frame Relay Statistics Collected in 96 15-minute Intervals ............................................................. A-5

PPP Statistics Collected in 96 15-minute Intervals ........................................................................... A-5

Industry Listings ................................................................................................................................ A-5

Ordering Information ......................................................................................................................... A-6

ix

Page 10: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................................... A-6

Connector Pin Assignments ............................................................................................................... A-7Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DTE Mode (Packet Use Only) ............................................. A-7Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DCE Mode ........................................................................... A-9Ethernet Connection Pin Assignments ........................................................................................ A-9Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Interface Pin Assignments ............................................ A-10Network 2 (5160 Only) Interface Pin Assignments .................................................................. A-10Supervisory Port Pin Assignments ............................................................................................ A-10

Appendix B SNMP AgentIntroduction .........................................................................................................................................B-1

SNMP Configuration Parameters .......................................................................................................B-1

SNMP MIBs .......................................................................................................................................B-1

SNMP Trap Configuration .................................................................................................................B-2

Generic MIB Loading Instructions ...................................................................................................B-10

x W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 11: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

CHAPTER 0PREFACE

About this ManualThis reference guide for the Verilink WANsuite 5160/5130 intelligent integrated access device (I2AD) describes unit features and specifications, configuration, and cabling. It is not a users guide containing step-by-step procedures. This manual is designed to be used as a reference regarding commands, interface ports, configuration parameters, and other information specific to your 5160/5130 unit.

Much of the information in this manual applies to the WANsuite 5160 and the WANsuite 5130 units. The screen captures throughout the manual are, for the most part, 5160 screens; however, where differences are significant, those differences are noted. When this manual refers to the unit, you should assume the information applies to both units.

Manual Organization

The chapters and appendices in this manual are arranged for quick reference when you need it. You do not have to read previous chapters to understand the subsequent chapters. Appendices are designed to complement the main chapters.

• Chapter 1, "About the WANsuite 5160/5130" – This chapter describes product features and capabilities.

• Chapter 2, "Installation" – This chapter describes unit port connections and powering information.

• Chapter 3, "Web Server Interface" – This chapter describes the menu screens and configuration parameters accessed through the Web server interface.

• Chapter 4, "VT100 Interface" − This chapter describes the menu screens and configuration parameters accessed through the VT100 interface.

• Chapter 5, "Front Panel LCD Interface"– This chapter describes the methods and options for configuring and controlling the unit through the front panel LCD interface.

• Appendix A, "Specifications" – This appendix defines the specifications for the WANsuite 5160/5130. In addition, this section provides ordering

P r e f a c e xi

Page 12: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

information and all the connector pin assignments for the interfaces on the back of the WANsuite 5160/5130.

• Appendix B, "SNMP Agent" − This appendix defines which Management Information Base (MIB) files are supported by the WANsuite 5160/5130 SNMP agent. In addition, instructions are provided for loading these MIB files into most SNMP management stations.

Typographic Conventions

The following table lists the conventions used throughout this guide.

Customer Service and Technical SupportVerilink provides easy access to customer support information through a variety of services. This section describes these services.

Support from Your Network Supplier

If assistance is required, contact your network supplier. Many suppliers are authorized Verilink service partners who are qualified to provide a variety of services, including network planning, installation, hardware maintenance, application training, and support services. When you contact your network supplier for assistance, have the following information ready:

• Diagnostic error messages

• A list of system hardware and software, including revision levels

• Details about recent configuration changes, if applicable

Support from Verilink

If you are unable to receive support from your network supplier or want to contact us directly, Verilink offers worldwide customer support by telephone, e-mail, and through Verilink’s Internet Web site.

Convention Description

A Notice calls attentions to important features or instructions.

A Caution alerts you to serious risk of data loss or other results that may cause you or the unit trouble if the warning is not heeded.

A Warning alerts you to the risk of serious damage to the unit or injury and possible death to the end user.

xii W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 13: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Telephone

Customer support is available by telephone 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. To speak directly with a Verilink customer service representative, you may dial one of the following numbers:

•Sales and Marketing: 800-VERILINK (837-4546)

•Technical Support: 800-285-2755 (toll-free)256-327-2255 (local)

E-mail

You can request sales and marketing information or pose a technical support question about your Verilink product by contacting us at the e-mail addresses provided below. Verilink will respond to e-mailed requests for support during regular business hours (8–5 CST, Monday–Friday).

•Sales and Marketing: [email protected]

•Technical Support: [email protected]

Internet

Visit Verilink’s Web site to access the latest Verilink product information, technical publications, news releases, contact information, and more:

http://www.verilink.com

If this reference manual is revised to reflect code changes or other updates, the most recent version will be posted to the Verilink Web site.

Returning a Unit to VerilinkIf for any reason you must return your Verilink product, it must be returned with the shipping prepaid, and packaged to the best commercial standard for electronic equipment. Verilink will pay shipping charges for delivery on return. You are responsible for mode and cost of shipment to Verilink.

You must have a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number marked on the shipping package. To obtain an RMA number, call Customer Service at 800-926-0085, extension 2282 or 2232. Products sent to Verilink without RMA numbers will be returned to the sender unopened, at the sender’s expense.

A product sent directly to Verilink for repair must first be assigned an RMA number. You may obtain an RMA number by calling Customer Service at 800-926-0085, extension 2282 or 2232.

When calling Verilink for an RMA, please have the following information available:

• Model number and serial number for each unit

• Reason for return and symptoms of problem

P r e f a c e xiii

Page 14: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

• Purchase order number to cover charges for out-of-warranty items

• Name and phone number of person we can contact if we have questions about the unit(s)

The address for you to use when returning a unit to Verilink will be provided when the RMA is issued. The standard delivery method for return shipments is Standard Ground for domestic returns and International Economy for international returns (unless otherwise specified).

xiv W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 15: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

C H A P T E R

1CHAPTER 1ABOUT THE WANSUITE

5160/5130

IntroductionThe telecommunications network service market is rapidly changing, where network monitoring, control, and higher performance in packet processing are not only expected, but demanded, at competitive price points. Verilink’s WANsuite family is based on our innovative, next-generation WAN access architecture − a highly flexible and powerful architecture that can meet the needs of many different customers in many different applications. Because it is so flexible, WANsuite products will continually evolve, offering our customers cutting-edge features at competitive prices.

The WANsuite 5160 is a service-aware T1/FT1 CSU/DSU with two Network ports (both of which operate in long-haul and short-haul mode); two Serial ports software-configurable for RS-232, EIA-530, or V.35 electrical connections; an asynchronous Supervisory port; a 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface; four status LEDs; an LCD front panel; and three input control keys. The WANsuite 5130 has one Serial port and does not have a Network 2 port. Except for these two differences, the 5130 has the same features as the 5160. Capable of accommodating a wide range of network configurations, the WANsuite 5160 and 5130 effectively combine voice, data, and network traffic over a single transmission facility and work with industry-standard network management solutions.

All of WANsuite 5160/5130’s installation, performance configuration, traffic monitoring, alarm reporting, and diagnostic capabilities can be configured through the units’ embedded Web server interface (WANsight™) using Microsoft® Internet Explorer™. The Web server interface can be accessed locally through the Ethernet port or the Supervisory port, or remotely through the Network port. Especially advantageous is WANsuite’s advanced monitoring and control capability that gives network administrators the ability to plan future capacity requirements. To extend the WANsuite 5160/5130’s functionality even further, Verilink offers an element management software system for reporting and real-time diagnostics.

A b o u t t h e W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0 1-1

Page 16: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The unit’s built-in ServiceAware™ technology lets network managers maximize available WAN bandwidth and verify SLAs. This management platform lets the end user see network activity (performance) and problems (diagnostics) on any permanent virtual circuit (PVC), access line or physical circuit.

Verilink’s FrameStart™ technology is standard with the WANsuite 5160/5130 and benefits the initial installation of frame relay circuits by eliminating the requirement for a frame relay test set. FrameStart ensures that T1 circuit status, signal quality, loopback code detection, access link condition, and the various Layer 2 frame relay investigation and reporting features are available and accurate.

Another feature of the WANsuite product line, IP Gateway enables IP packet routing throughout a LAN/WAN network architecture using static routing configurations or dynamic routing protocols (Routing Information Protocol − RIP 1 and RIP 2 − or Open Shortest Path First − OSPF).

RIP 1 and RIP 2 allow routers to exchange routing information. WANsuite then uses this information exchange to build routing tables for IP Packet routes. After building the routing tables, WANsuite periodically broadcasts the contents to neighboring routers so that your network can choose the most efficient routes available.

OSPF uses link-state routing algorithms to calculate routes based on the number of routers, transmission speeds, delays, and route costs. Using the OSPF protocol, WANsuite works with other routers in your telecommunications fabric to dynamically change routing “on the fly” to make use of the most efficient and cost-effective transit across your network.

Because IP Gateway enables WANsuite to route IP traffic either statically or dynamically across your LAN/WAN architecture, your need for costly routers is substantially reduced. WANsuite is a one-stop solution that can help you meet the requirements of your many different applications.

DHCP uses a server-client architecture to assign IP addresses to PCs and workstations on the LAN. The DHCP server dynamically assigns these IP addresses, which can be either temporary or permanent, to each PC or workstation (DHCP client). These IP addresses are "housed" on the DHCP server.

NAT enables an enterprise to set up two sets of IP addresses − one set for internal network use (or LAN traffic) and one set for external use (or Internet traffic). This can provide a layer of security for a company by eliminating outside access to internal IP addresses from the Internet.

Bridging separate LANs together is another option for the IP traffic. Using the IEEE Standard 802.1D Transparent Bridging specification, the WANsuite 5160/5130 can simplify your network architecture by allowing you to bridge separate LANs across a WAN so they operate as a single LAN.

The WANsuite 5160/5130 gives service providers and enterprise customers the capability to monitor end-to-end network performance (with support for up to 256 virtual circuits) as well as the capability to verify Service Level Agreements (SLAs); isolate performance problems to the LAN, local loop, or

1-2 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 17: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

frame relay network; determine appropriate bandwidth needs; and monitor network trends to aid in future capacity planning.

TCP Server, a feature of the WANsuite product line, provides connectivity to multiple endpoints by associating a TCP port with each endpoint while reducing the number of physical connections at the central site to one 10/100Base-T Ethernet port.

Features of the WANsuite 5160/5130

PerformanceHistorically, WAN access devices have tended to perform well as single-function devices such as CSUs/DSUs, but have not been optimized to address higher level traffic issues such as service levels and integration. Verilink's architecture and Web-based user interface work together to address all access issues as services and applications, rather than as circuits and protocols, for exceptional WAN management performance.

To further leverage its Web browser interface, Verilink's new architecture also allows firmware to be upgraded via the Web from a standard browser, with password control, if desired.

SNMP ManagementWith integrated SNMP in-band management, enterprise managers can now manage Verilink WANsuite units and their integral CSUs/DSUs as a single unit. With only one LAN segment in the network, all Verilink WANsuite platforms can be managed by SNMP. With self-learning functionality, these platforms learn their frame relay environment and eliminate the need for remote, trained personnel. By downloading all configuration parameters from the central site, no interaction is required at remote sites to establish connectivity. WANs can be constructed using frame relay or leased-line services. Verilink’s WANsuite 5160/5130 allows any port to be configured for any of its available service technologies through simple software configuration. Network managers can now fine tune the enterprise network for the lowest cost and highest performance.

Intelligent WAN Access ArchitectureVerilink's next-generation WAN access architecture is built around a PowerPC™ processor, and works with non-proprietary network management solutions via SNMP. An embedded Web server supplies a simple-to-use interface for configuration and statistics collection, with a service table for mapping services to ports, an endpoint table for configuring and monitoring service endpoints, and a user table for traffic monitoring and control.

A b o u t t h e W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0 1-3

Page 18: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Optional Advanced Network ManagementAs an option for the WANsuite 5160/5130, Verilink offers a network management system based on RedPoint's NetVoyant™ software, which was designed to provide IT professionals with the information required to make informed, enterprise-wide capacity-planning and investment decisions. NetVoyant is an NT-based element management system that includes an ODBC-compliant database, CORBA IDLs for customization and flexibility, real-time diagnostics, and extensive reporting and trending application support. The solution employs an open-system, multi-vendor support approach for network management, monitoring, and the collection of statistics from any SNMP-based networking device, including Verilink equipment already in the field.

WANsuite extends the functionality of NetVoyant’s software by incorporating customized configuration modules. This advanced network management system is offered as an option for the WANsuite 5160/5130. Please contact Verilink for availability and pricing information.

About FrameStart TechnologyThe WANsuite 5160/5130’s FrameStart technology ensures that frame relay service is operational prior to installation and connection to other equipment. FrameStart’s integral frame relay circuit installation and diagnostic tools help reduce equipment and installation costs, simplify configuration setup, and alleviate frame relay connection uncertainties − all in one unit.

The WANsuite 5160/5130 supports both FrameStart Install and FrameStart Monitor modes as well as Layer 2 statistics gathering and diagnostic capabilities that maximize network availability and manage the growth of the network.

FrameStart Install enables step-by-step validation of network operations and requires no data terminal equipment such as routers or FRADs. If a DTE device is connected, operation is halted to perform installation diagnostics. With FrameStart Install, you have the power to perform advanced tests, including the following:

• Local Management Interface (LMI) Sourcing

• End-to-end Integrity

• PVC Delay Testing

• Network Receive Level

FrameStart Monitor complements FrameStart Install to monitor real-time network conditions nonintrusively when connected to real-world applications. FrameStart Monitor diagnostics maintain and manage the activity of the frame relay network from the host FrameStart unit. FrameStart Monitor also performs the following:

• LMI Monitoring

• LMI Auto-Sourcing

1-4 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 19: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

• SOS Mode

• New Circuit Installation

WANsuite 5160/5130 Overview and AdvantagesVerilink’s WANsuite 5160 and 5130 are innovative, highly intelligent, software-based WAN access devices optimized for frame relay access. The WANsuite 5160/5130 provides network managers with the tools necessary to monitor and troubleshoot voice, data, and network transmission systems. The ability to use the WANsuite 5160/5130 as an IP Gateway greatly increases its flexibility while reducing the customer’s networking costs. In addition, the WANsuite 5160/5130 delivers valuable tools for the following:

• Measuring and reporting performance

• Verifying Service Level Agreements (SLAs)

• Managing network resources to ensure optimum performance

• Analyzing trends to aid in network planning

• Managing Web browser and/or in-band/out-of-band SNMP

WANsuite 5160/5130 advantages include the following:

• Offers two Network ports, two Serial ports (one each on the WANsuite 5130), an asynchronous Supervisory port, and an Ethernet port − the WANsuite 5160/5130 is extremely flexible and adapts to numerous network applications.

• Ensures a higher level of service − WANsuite 5160/5130 acts as an expert frame relay Service Level advisor for service providers and users.

• Lowers facility costs − WANsuite 5160/5130's easy installation and configuration cut down on maintenance and sparing costs.

• Reduces the need for costly routers with its IP Gateway feature − WANsuite handles all your networking needs.

Features Summary• A Powerful Core Architecture:

• 10/100Base-T Ethernet port for Management or IP Gateway

• Single T1 Network port on the 5130 and two on the 5160 configurable in either long-haul or short-haul modes

• Single Serial port on the 5130 and dual Serial ports on the 5160 software-configurable for RS-232, EIA-530, or V.35

• Supervisory port for local management via VT100

• IP Gateway:

• Frame Relay or PPP

• 10/100Base-T Ethernet port

A b o u t t h e W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0 1-5

Page 20: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

• Static routes

• Static Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

• Dynamic routing protocols, including RIP 1, RIP 2, and OSPF

• Un-numbered Network

• Address Management: NAT and DHCP

• Programmable alarm thresholds

• Transparent Bridging

• Configurable Serial (Data) Port:

• Supports V.35, EIA-530, and RS-232

• Security Features

• IP Host Access List

• Multilevel password access

• NAT

• Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA):

• Diagnostics

• Data Monitor function shows all traffic activity on a given RTU port of a remote site, as if a data scope were physically connected between the WANsuite unit and the RTU.

• RTU loopback lets you set a remote unit’s RTU port in loopback mode so that any data sent towards the RTU from the central site will be echoed back towards the central site. Verifies data integrity to the RTU port.

• TCP Server allows multiple connections to TCP clients.

• Asynchronous multicasting lets the WANsuite 5160/5130 transmit identical data to multiple endpoints.

• SCADA traffic priority puts SCADA traffic in a specific queue over a frame relay link and puts all other traffic (Ethernet, In-Band Management, Serial Frame Relay) in a normal priority queue.

• Blowfish encryption on a per-DLCI basis with configurable encryption key lengths up to 448 bits. This feature offers secure connections to data-sensitive SCADA sites.

• A Suite of Performance Monitoring Tools:

• Monitoring capability for up to 256 virtual circuits (Data Link Connection Identifiers, or DLCIs)

• T1/FT1 performance monitoring, including complete diagnostic capabilities and test modes and auto-learned DS0s.

• SLA monitoring and management

• Committed Information Rate (CIR) enforcement per DLCI

• Programmable alarm thresholds

1-6 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 21: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

• E-mail notification of alarm status for immediate notification of potential network problems

• Management Interfaces:

• WANsight − an innovative, embedded Web-based user interface for remote configuration and real-time reporting via Web browser (Verilink recommends Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher) that decreases installation and configuration time for service employees, simplifies troubleshooting and fault isolation of network problems, and optimizes management of both TDM and frame-based services

• VT100 or TELNET

• Local Supervisory port

• Ethernet port for management or IP routing

• LCD

• Frame Relay Aware:

• Supports leased-line and frame relay services

• Layer 2 end-to-end visibility and control

• Embedded frame relay test set

• Layer 3 support for visibility beyond the Network layer (up to 25 protocols)

• “Top Talker” reports − lets you find out who’s generating the most IP traffic on your LAN

Front Panel The front panel of the WANsuite 5160 (Figure 1.1) provides three user-activated input control buttons, four LED status indicators, and a 2-line, 16-character LCD that provides access to unit configuration, diagnostics, and utilities.

Figure 1.1 Front Panel of WANsuite 5160

A b o u t t h e W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0 1-7

Page 22: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The front panel LED status indicators are defined in the table below:

The front panel of the WANsuite 5130 (Figure 1.2) also provides three user-activated input control buttons, four LED status indicators (although different from the 5160), and a 2-line, 16-character liquid crystal display (LCD) panel that provides access to unit configuration, diagnostics and utilities.

Figure 1.2 WANsuite 5130 Front Panel

Indicator Description

NET This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been configured. The indicator lights green when the T1 link is up and all configured protocol services are established.The indicator lights red if the T1 link is down and the configured protocol is not established. The indicator lights amber if the T1 link is up and at least one configured protocol is not established.

#1 SERIAL and #2 SERIAL

DTR Alarm Enabled:

This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been configured.

The indicator lights green when DTR is active and the configured protocol is established.

The indicator lights red when DTR is not active and the configured protocol is not established.

The indicator lights amber when DTR is not active or the configured protocol is not established.

DTR Alarm Disabled:

This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been configured.

The indicator lights green when the configured protocol is established.

The indicator lights red when the configured protocol is not established.

POWER This indicator lights green when power is applied to the unit.

The indicator lights amber in test modes (Port looped or BERT active).

1-8 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 23: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The WANsuite 5130’s front panel LED status indicators are defined in the table below:

The user-activated input control buttons used to access and set configuration and control options from the LCD menus are the same on both the 5160 and 5130, and are defined in the table below:

Indicator Description

NET This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been configured. The indicator lights green when the T1 link is up and all configured protocol services are established.The indicator lights red if the T1 link is down and the configured protocol is not established. The indicator lights amber if the T1 link is up and at least one configured protocol is not established.

SERIAL DTR Alarm Enabled:

This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been configured.

The indicator lights green when DTR is active and the configured protocol is established.

The indicator lights red when DTR is not active and the configured protocol is not established.

The indicator lights amber when DTR is not active or the configured protocol is not established.

DTR Alarm Disabled:

This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been configured.

The indicator lights green when the configured protocol is established.

The indicator lights red when the configured protocol is not established.

ALARM This indicator lights red if an alarm condition exists

The indicator lights amber if a “yellow” alarm condition exists.

POWER This indicator lights green when power is applied to the unit.

The indicator lights amber in test modes (Port looped or BERT active).

Button Description

EXIT The EXIT button lets you exit a menu option which then places the unit in the next higher level in the menu hierarchy. If you are editing an option and press the EXIT button, you will exit that screen without saving any changes. If you are in the main menu, pressing EXIT logs off the unit.

A b o u t t h e W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0 1-9

Page 24: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Rear Panel ConnectionsThe rear panel of the WANsuite 5160 has seven connectors − POWER, SUPERVISORY PORT, 10/100 ETHERNET, SERIAL INTERFACE #1, SERIAL INTERFACE #2, NET #2, and NET #1 − as shown in Figure 1.3 below. For more specific information regarding dimensions and optional equipment, refer to Appendix A, Specifications.

Figure 1.3 WANsuite 5160 Rear Panel

The rear panel of the WANsuite 5130 has five connectors − POWER, SUPERVISORY PORT, 10/100 ETHERNET, SERIAL INTERFACE, and NET − as shown in Figure 1.4 below.

Figure 1.4 WANsuite 5130 Rear Panel

The following paragraphs describe the 5160/5130 connectors.

Supervisory PortThe SUPERVISORY PORT on the 5160/5130 is a DB-9 female DCE connector configured for 8 bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit. Bit rates are configured through the Web server (see Supervisory Screen on page 3-18) or VT100 interface (Supervisory Configuration Screen on page 4-18). The Supervisory port speed can be set to 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps. The initial default rate of the Supervisory port is 19200 bps.

SCROLL The SCROLL button lets you review the available options for a given level in the menu hierarchy or to scroll through possible settings for a parameter. You can also use the SCROLL button to set alphanumerical values, where applicable, by scrolling incrementally through digits 0–9 or letters A–Z and a–z.

SELECT The SELECT button lets you select the currently displayed option or value for a given field, and is also used to enter an “edit” mode for parameters that require user-specified input. Additionally, you can use the SELECT button to confirm certain actions or settings.

Button Description

1-10 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 25: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

NOTICE: For information on pinout assignments for this connector, refer to Supervisory Port Pin Assignments on page A-10. See Ordering Information on page A-6 for information on cables for this connector.

The Supervisory port performs several different functions. It serves as the VT100 interface port, providing VT100 screens. It also supports asynchronous PPP, providing access to the Web Server interface. In addition, the Supervisory port is an asynchronous data port. Data is encapsulated in frame relay packets and then transmitted through the Network port.

On power-up, the Supervisory port sends out diagnostic messages at the bit rate of 115.2 kbps until the Supervisory service acquires the Supervisory port. These diagnostic messages can disrupt the connected device; however, you can configure the unit to disable their transmission.

NOTICE: A null modem (crossover) cable is required to connect a modem to the Supervisory port.

10/100 EthernetThe WANsuite 5160/5130 provides one 10/100 ETHERNET interface. This interface is an eight-pin modular jack that complies with standard twisted-pair, 10/100Base-T requirements. The 10/100Base-T cable is supplied by the end user. Refer to Ethernet Connection Pin Assignments on page A-9 for pin assignments and cable descriptions.

Ethernet LED Indicators

There are two unlabeled indicator LEDs on either side of the 10/100 ETHERNET jack. The LED on the left side of the jack pulses amber to indicate data activity (either transmit or receive). The LED on the right side of the jack lights green to indicate that the link layer is operational.

Serial Interface(s)The two SERIAL interfaces on the 5160 and the single SERIAL interface on the 5130 located on the rear of the units are multi-protocol interfaces presented physically as DB-25 connections. The protocols supported by these interfaces are RS-232, EIA-530, and V.35.

Optional cables that adapt the DB-25 interface to the 34-pin V.35 interface are available. These cables are listed under Optional Equipment on page A-6. DB-25–to–DB-25 cables are also available if your installation needs require them. See Ordering Information on page A-6 for details. Pin assignments for the Serial interface are also listed in Appendix A, Specifications.

A b o u t t h e W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0 1-11

Page 26: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

CAUTION: FCC rules require that interconnecting cables carrying high-speed data be shielded appropriately in order to minimize radio frequency interference.

Network InterfacesLabeled on the rear panel of the WANsuite 5160 as NET #1 and NET #2, and on the 5130 as NET, these interfaces’ connections are standard RJ-48C, eight-pin modular jacks that contain an automatic line build out (ALBO). The ALBO allows the unit to be located a substantial distance away from the telco network interface with a receive signal level to −27 dB. These interfaces operate in either long-haul or short-haul mode. To view the pinout assignments for these interfaces, refer to Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Interface Pin Assignments and Network 2 (5160 Only) Interface Pin Assignments on page A-10.

The Network interface transmit LBO level should be set as instructed in the Line Build-out parameters section on page 3-7. Maximum suggested cable lengths for the connection from the unit to the network are listed in the table below. Calculations are based on a cable temperature of 70 °F, 0.083 µF/mile capacitance, a 27-dB loss, and a 100-Ω, non-loaded, twisted-pair cable.

CAUTION: In accordance with FCC Rules, Part 68.218(b), you must notify the telephone company prior to disconnecting this product.

Power Connection The POWER port is an eight-pin circular mini-DIN connector that connects either an autoranging 100–240 VAC (shown in Figure 1.5 below) or an autoranging 18−150 VDC external power supply (connection shown in Figure 1.6 below) to the unit. The WANsuite 5160/5130 must be used with the UL Listed/CSA Certified Class 2 power supply provided with the unit or ordered separately from Verilink. The unit has no power switch.

Cable TypeLoss per 1000 ft

(dB)Max Cable Length

(ft)

26-gauge PIC 6.8 4,400

24-gauge PIC 5.4 5,500

22-gauge PIC 4.2 7,100

19-gauge PIC 3.0 10,000

(PIC - Plastic Insulated Cable)

1-12 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 27: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 1.5 WANsuite 5160/5130 AC Power Supply Unit

Figure 1.6 Connection for VDC Power Supply

When power is applied to the unit, the front panel indicators flash for approximately 10 to 15 seconds as the unit initializes. The green POWER LED on the front panel will remain illuminated as long as the unit receives power. This LED turns amber when the unit is in test mode.

CAUTION: Always plug the external power supply into a grounded power outlet.

NOTICE: Power supply contacts In 1 and In 2 are polarity insensitive.

NOTICE: Per UL 1950 and CSA 950 Clause 1.7.2, if the power supply cord is intended to serve as a disconnect device, an easily accessible socket must be installed near the equipment.

Power Failure

If the indicator does not illuminate, check the power connections and the primary AC circuit breaker.

7

4

6

3

12

8

5+5V

+5V+5V

GND

GND

GNDShield Ground

A b o u t t h e W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0 1-13

Page 28: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The WANsuite 5160/5130 provides non-volatile memory retention of the unit configuration in case of a power failure. This feature allows the unit to automatically restore normal service and retain pre-existing time and date information following a power loss.

1-14 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 29: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

C H A P T E R

2CHAPTER 2INSTALLATION

This chapter describes the contents of your WANsuite 5160/5130 shipment and provides information on connecting and installing the unit.

The WANsuite 5160 and 5130 use an “Installation Wizard” to help you automatically install the unit quickly and accurately. Procedures for using this Installation Wizard are also described in this chapter.

Unpacking and InspectionThe WANsuite 5160/5130 is shipped in cardboard cartons with foam inserts for shock and vibration protection. When your shipment arrives, inspect the shipping container and contents and compare all items with those on the packing list.

If the contents of the shipment are incomplete or if there is mechanical damage or defect, notify Verilink Customer Service (see page xii). If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged, notify the carrier and Verilink immediately and make a notation on the delivery receipt that the container was damaged. (If possible, obtain the signature and name of the person making delivery.) Retain the packaging material until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the unit has been checked both mechanically and electrically.

Supplied MaterialsThe WANsuite 5160/5130 shipment includes the following standard items:

• WANsuite 5160 unit or WANsuite 5130 unit

• External power supply and power cord

• T1 network cable

• Serial (Supervisory) cable

• Verilink Documentation CD

I n s t a l l a t i o n 2-1

Page 30: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

For specific applications, see Optional Equipment on page A-6 for additional cables and adapters. Contact Verilink Technical Support for further assistance and specific part numbers.

Installation WizardOne of the ways to configure and monitor the WANsuite 5160/5130 is through the Web Browser interface. To gain access to this interface, the unit must be configured with an IP Address. Verilink provides a DOS-based program – the Verilink Configuration Wizard – to aid in this initial configuration.

To configure the IP Address using the Verilink Configuration Wizard, use the CD-ROM disk included with this product and follow the steps listed below.

NOTICE: You may also access the Verilink Configuration Wizard on Verilink’s Web site: www.verilink.com.

1 Using the supplied cable, connect the unit’s DB-9 Supervisory port to a COM port on your PC. (Take note of which COM port is connected.)

2 Insert the Verilink CD-ROM disc into your PC’s CD-ROM drive.

3 Use Windows “Explore” to view the contents of the CD and select the folder labeled “Utilities.” In this folder will be a file named ipwiz.exe; this executable file is the Verilink Configuration Wizard application. Double-click on this file to launch the program. After the program is fully launched, you will see the following screen:

4 Using the Tab key to move from field to field, move the cursor to the “COM Port” field. Using the Spacebar, toggle between the available options until the correct COM port is shown (COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4). Be sure to choose the same COM port as the port to which you connected the unit.

5 By default, the “Baud Rate” field will display 115200 (bits per second). For the purpose of this installation, do not change the displayed baud rate from its default. Proceed directly to the next step.

2-2 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 31: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

6 Using the Tab key again, move the cursor to the “IP Address” field and enter the appropriate IP Address for the unit (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx). If necessary, repeat this process for the “Subnet Mask” and “Gateway Address” fields.

7 Next, move the cursor to the “Write To Unit” field and press the Enter key. The program will prompt you to reset the unit.

8 To reset the unit, cycle the unit’s power (i.e., disconnect the power supply cable from the unit and then reconnect it). The Configuration Wizard will then automatically download the configuration information to the unit.

9 Take notice of the status messages displayed at the bottom of the Configuration Wizard screen. When the download is complete, your PC will beep and the status message bar will display “Finished.”

10 Finally, move the cursor to the “Exit” prompt and press Enter. The Configuration Wizard program will close.

I n s t a l l a t i o n 2-3

Page 32: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

2-4 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 33: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-1

C H A P T E R

3CHAPTER 3WEB SERVER INTERFACE

The WANsuite 5160/5130 has an innovative, embedded Web-based user interface (WANsight) for remote configuration and real-time reporting via Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher. Access to the Web server interface and how the interface is used to configure the WANsuite 5160/5130 unit are described in detail below.

NOTICE: Verilink recommends the use of Microsoft’s Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher because if you use other Internet browsers to access the Web server interface, some screen elements will not display as described in this manual.

NOTICE: The material presented in this chapter follows the order listed in the navigation bar on the left side of the Web Server interface screen. However, because the parameters you specify in the Service Table attach protocols to interfaces, you must configure the Service Table first. (See Services Screen on page 3-19.) You will not be able to allocate channels (see Channel Table Details Screen on page 3-26) until the Service Table has been configured.

Configuration through the VT100 interface is covered in Chapter 4, and configuration through the front panel is covered in Chapter 5.

Web Server AccessYou can access the Web Server interface by connecting to its IP address. This connection can be directly through the 10/100 Ethernet port, in-band via PPP over any port, or in-band via encapsulated IP traffic on the Frame Relay circuit.

NOTICE: Any changes to the unit’s configuration MUST be followed by a “Submit” if there is a “Submit” button on the menu. If you change the Service Table, you must perform a “Save and Restart.”

Page 34: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

To access the Web Server interface, type the unit’s IP address in the browser’s Address (or Location) field and press the “Enter” key.

Layout of Interface ScreensWhen you first access the Web Server interface, your browser will display a screen that is divided into three frames. The upper frame forms a border across the top of the screen; it identifies the Verilink unit in service and displays the hardware and software revision and serial numbers under which the unit is operating. The far right corner of the upper frame displays whether or not a “Save and Restart” is necessary when parameters are changed on the currently displayed screen.

The area beneath the upper frame is divided into two side-by-side frames. The frame on the left side of this area depicts a hierarchical “tree” structure used to navigate through the various interface screens. Each “branch” on the tree guides you to more specific upper-level information about the unit and its configuration. Note that the Interfaces, Applications, and Utilities branches do not link to a page − these branches simply provide structure for navigation. The frame on the right side of the screen will display the actual configuration or display screen. The screen captures throughout this chapter show only the configuration/display portion of the screen, except in the case of the Unit screen, which shows all three frames. The Unit screen represents the top of the navigation tree.

Unit ScreenThe Unit screen shown in Figure 3.1 is the first screen displayed by your unit’s Web Server interface. The Unit screen for the WANsuite 5130 is very similar to the 5160, with the exception being that the 5130 has one Network and one Serial interface listed in the navigation pane on the left-hand side of the screen. The Unit screen lets you view and set specific information about the unit in service.

3-2 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 35: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.1 Unit Screen

The Unit screen displays the following fields:

Field Function

Object ID Display-only field used to point an SNMP agent to this ID.

Up Time Displays the amount of time the unit has been up and running.

Contact Stores the name of a point-of-contact for system failure.

Name Read/write field that holds the unit’s name.

Location Read/write field that holds the unit's location.

FrameStart ID Read/write field that holds the unit's ID that uniquely identifies the unit and is used in the FrameStart applications.

LCD Interface Lets the user enable or disable the LCD interface buttons of the unit.

User Definable Fields

Read/write fields for user-specific labels and values. Information resides in non-volatile memory.

Time Read/write field that holds the unit's internal time setting in standard 24-hour HH:MM:SS format.

Date Read/write field that holds the unit's internal date setting in standard MM/DD/YY format.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-3

Page 36: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The Unit screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Maintenance Reset Use this button to access a screen where you can perform a Maintenance Reset (Figure 3.2). When you click on the arrow in the pull-down menu box on the screen, you will have the option to perform a TDM, Packet, Packet 2, Packet 3, or Packet 4 reset. When you select one of these options, all previous configurations will be lost and the unit will be set back to the specified factory default.

Figure 3.2 Maintenance Reset Screen

NOTICE: Performing a “Maintenance Reset” or a “Save and Restart” will terminate communications with the unit.

Save and Restart Use this button to save the current configuration settings and then proceed with a restart. Clicking the “Save and Restart” button on the Unit screen will display a confirmation screen as shown in Figure 3.3 below. Click the “Save and Restart” button on the confirmation screen to confirm the action.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed. Use the top “Submit” button to set any unit parameters changed in the upper section of the screen, and the lower “Submit” button to set the real-time clock.

Maintenance Reset Brings up a screen where you can reset unit to its default TDM or Packet, Packet 2, Packet 3, or Packet 4 configuration.

Save and Restart Saves the current configuration and restarts the unit.

3-4 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 37: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.3 Save and Restart Screen

InterfacesThe WANsuite 5160 has the following interfaces: Network 1, Network 2, Serial 1, Serial 2, 10/100 Ethernet, and Supervisory. The WANsuite 5130 has one Network and one Serial interface, but in other respects has the same interfaces with the same parameters as the WANsuite 5160. Each of the interfaces and their associated screens/menus are described below.

Network ScreensThe WANsuite 5160 Network (Figure 3.4) screens let you view and make changes to the Network interfaces’ configuration as described below. In addition, the screens provide a table that displays the alarm values for the Network interfaces. All Network ports operate in either long-haul or short-haul mode. On the WANsuite 5160, the Network 1 and 2 screens are the same except that at the top of the Network 2 screen (shown in Figure 3.5), there is an additional parameter, “Function,” that’s described, along with the other screen parameters, below.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-5

Page 38: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.4 Network 1 Screen

Figure 3.5 Network 2 Screen (Top Portion Only)

Function (Network 2Only)

In the “Slaved” function, Network 2 is slaved and can only be mapped to Network 1. In the Network function, Network 2 functions as an independent network, but can only be mapped to Serial 2.

Values: Slaved, NetworkDefault: Slaved

NOTICE: The “Function” parameter fundamentally affects the operation of the unit. Even though this parameter is found only on the Network 2 screen, its setting affects both Network ports and the Service table.

Mode Selects the network service type.

Values: Long Haul, Short HaulDefault: Long Haul

3-6 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 39: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Line Build-Out (LongHaul)

Sets the transmit Line Build Out (LBO) for the Long-Haul network interface.

Values: 0, −7.5, −15.0, −22.5 dBDefault: 0 dB

DSX Level (ShortHaul)

Specifies the DTE DSX-1 interface output level.

Values: 0−110, 111−220, 221−330, 331−440, 441−550, 551−660, >661 ftDefault: 0−110 ft

Framing Selects the framing for the network side of the DSU/CSU.

Values ESF, D4Default: ESF

Coding Sets the network side line coding.

Values: AMI, B8ZSDefault: B8ZS

Timing Sets the timing source to synchronize the unit’s internal timing generators. In all cases, slips are controlled to occur on frame boundaries at the Network ports when timing synchronization is lost. The options are as follows:

Network 1 (5160)

“Function” parameter (on the Network 2 screen) in “Slaved” mode − Internal, Network 1, Network 2, Serial 1, Serial 2

“Function” parameter (on the Network 2 screen) in Network mode − Internal, Network 1, Serial 1

Network 2 (5160)

“Function” parameter in “Slaved” mode − timing parameter is ignored in Slave mode

“Function” parameter in Network mode− Internal, Network 2, Serial 2

Network (5130) − Internal, Network, Serial

Definitions of the timing sources are as follows:

Internal – The unit’s internal frequency standard (T1 1.544 Mbps ± 50 bps) is used for all timing.

Network 1, Network 2, Network – Timing is derived from the Network port recovered clock.

Serial 1, Serial 2, Serial – Timing is derived from the Serial port recovered clock.

Zero Suppression Determines whether ones density insertion is activated after 15 zeros. This parameter is ignored if the Coding parameter is set to “B8ZS.”

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

PRM Enable Lets you establish which performance messaging standard will be employed to initiate Performance Report Message (PRM) functions. Setting this field to

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-7

Page 40: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

“Enable” instructs the unit to use ANSI T1.403, which sends a PRM once every second. Setting this field to “Disable” instructs the unit to use AT&T TR54016, which provides performance reporting on request only.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

Learn DS0s on Boot Determines if the unit will attempt to discover active DS0s (after power-up, Save and Restart). Active DS0s will then be assigned to the first associated network service.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

Learned DS0 Rate Specifies the rate at which each discovered DS0 will be set.

Values: As 56K/64KDefault: As 64K

NOTICE: The unit will search for active DS0s for a maximum of 7 seconds if learning “As 64k” and for 30 seconds if learning “As 56K.”

Error Status and Alarm Thresholds Table

The unit can be programmed to generate an alarm condition based on a specific level of performance degradation. The Network screens present a table that provides current error status and alarm threshold information.

Acceptable alarm thresholds are set for periods 15 minutes (900 seconds) and sampled every second. The error types listed in the following paragraphs can be preset to a value between 0 and 900 seconds. Setting a field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm on that statistic. To effectively disable alarm reporting, set all fields to “0” (zero).

The 15-minute time frame is not based on the TR 54016 or T1.403 interval boundaries, but is a time window based on the accumulated counts over the previous fifteen 1-minute intervals. In all cases, if the number of actual network errored seconds in the previous 15 minutes reaches the preset threshold for the specified error type, an alarm condition is declared.

The four columns of the status table are as follows:

The table provides error status and alarm threshold information for the following error parameters:

• Status Displays the current status of the network port.

• Alarm Displays the alarm value of the network port. The unit declares an alarm as soon as the count exceeds the threshold set.

• Count Displays the number of events or occurrences of this statistic that have been detected.

• Threshold A read/write field that can be set to a desirable threshold.

3-8 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 41: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

ES Sets the Errored Seconds (ES) threshold. An ES is a 1-second period in which at least one logic error occurred. The default value is 45 seconds.

SES Sets the Severely Errored Seconds (SES) threshold. An SES is a 1-second period in which at least 320 CRC errors or one Out-of-Frame (OOF) error occurred. The default value is 5 seconds.

LOSS Sets the Loss of Signal Seconds (LOSS) threshold. A LOSS is a 1-second period in which the T1 received signal is interrupted. The default value is 5 seconds.

UAS Sets the Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold. A UAS is a 1-second period in which consecutive severely errored seconds cause an unavailable state. The default is 0 (zero) seconds (Disabled).

CSS Sets the Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) threshold. The default is 0 (zero) seconds (Disabled).

BPVS Sets the Bipolar Violation Errored Seconds (BPVS) threshold. A BPVS is a 1-second period in which at least one bipolar violation occurred. The default is 0 (zero) seconds (Disabled).

OOFS Sets the Out of Frame Seconds (OOFS) threshold. An OOFS is a 1-second period in which a frame sync loss occurred. The default value is 5 seconds.

AISS Sets the Alarm Indication Signal Seconds (AISS) threshold. An AIS is a 1-second period when unframed all ones are received. The default is 0 (zero) seconds (Disabled).

RAS Sets the Remote Alarm Seconds (RAS) threshold. A RAS is generated by the terminal equipment when an improper signal is received from the facility (or upon receipt of unframed all ones). The default is 0 (zero) seconds (Disabled).

Reset Timer Sets the Reset Timer threshold. This field is the contiguous number of seconds that an alarm parameter must be clear before the alarm is reset. Applicable values range from 000 through 900. A value of “000” means the alarm will never be reset.

The Network screens provide the user-activated buttons described in the table below.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Clear Alarms Resets the alarm conditions and counts to zero.

Learn DS0s Now Learns which DS0s are active and assigns them to the first associated network service. Learned DS0s are based on the idle pattern specified in the Channel Table (see below).

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-9

Page 42: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

CAUTION: Performance data will be lost upon power cycle or after performing a Maintenance Reset or a Save and Restart.

Figure 3.6 Network Performance/Summary Screen

In addition to the error parameters found in the Error Status and Alarm Thresholds Table on page 3-8, the following error parameters are included on the Network Performance/Summary table:

BES A Bursty Error Second (BES) is a 1-second period during which at least more than one but fewer than 320 CRC6 errors occurred.

LOFC The Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) represents the number of time a loss of frame is declared. A loss of frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous loss of signal or OOF.

CRCES A Cyclic Redundancy Check Errored Second (CRCES) is a method of confirming the integrity of received data.

Beneath the Performance/Summary table are two buttons: “Performance 24 Hour” and “Performance 30 Day.” Clicking either of these buttons will display a detailed summary of the error events that have occurred during each

Performance Displays a Performance/Summary screen that shows a current count of the number of error events that have occurred over the past 24 hours and the past 30 days.

Channels Displays the Channel Table Details Screen on page 3-26, showing each channel by index number. Each channel’s rate and service (by number) are displayed and can be changed through user input.

Button Function

3-10 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 43: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

15-minute interval of the past 24 hours (Figure 3.7) or during each interval (day) of the past 30 days (Figure 3.8).

Figure 3.7 Network Performance 24 Hour Screen

Figure 3.8 Network Performance 30 Day Screen

Serial ScreensThe Serial 1 and Serial 2 screens on the WANsuite 5160 or Serial screen on the WANsuite 5130 let you view and make changes to the unit’s Serial interface configuration as described below. The parameters on all Serial screens are the same except for the Invert Clock parameter, which is found only on the Serial 2 screen; therefore, the WANsuite 5160 Serial 2 screen (Figure 3.9) is the only one shown below.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-11

Page 44: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.9 Serial 2 Screen

Type This parameter selects the type of interface (based on its electrical signal characteristics) used by the equipment connected to the Serial port.

Values: V.35, RS-232, EIA-530Default: V.35

NOTICE: V.35 requires the use of an optional cable. Refer to Optional Equipment on page A-6 for ordering information.

Mode By default, the Serial port serves as a DCE port in both Packet and TDM modes. However, the Serial port can serve as a DTE port when the unit is in Packet mode.

If the Serial port connects to a DTE device (such as a FRAD or a router), the Mode parameter must be set to “DCE.” If this port connects to a DCE device (such as a DSU/CSU), this parameter must be set to “DTE” (valid only for Packet mode, not TDM).

Values: DCE, DTEDefault: DCE

NOTICE: DTE mode requires the use of an optional DTE cable. Refer to Appendix A for ordering information.

Packet Rate If the port is running in Packet mode, the Rate must be configured to the desired port speed (in bits per second). In TDM mode, the port speed rate will be set by configuring the next four parameters (Start Channel, Number of Channels, Bundling, and Channel Rate).

Values: Nx56K or Nx64K where N = 1-32Default: 1536 kbps

3-12 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 45: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Bundling Selects whether the DTE channel assignment is made as a “Contiguous” group or as “Alternate” channels. Selecting “Alternate” ensures ones density. Because the unit allows individual channels to be configured for a service, a value of “Arbitrary” will be returned for this parameter if the current channel allocation is not contiguous or Alternate. The “Arbitrary” value can only be supplied by the unit − it cannot be set by the user.

Values: Contiguous, Alternate, ArbitraryDefault: Contiguous

NOTICE: Because “Alternate” Bundling assigns every other channel, only half the channels are available.

Start Channel Selects the starting channel in the 24-channel DS1 bit stream. Starting with the specified channel, the unit automatically assigns the channels that follow.

Values: 1 through 24Default: 1

Number of Channels Specifies the number of channels to be assigned to the DTE.

Values: 0 through 24Default: 24 Channel Rate

Channel Rate The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps. If “Νx64K” is selected, the ones density requirements of the T1 network line must be ensured. If “Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0 channel is maintained.

Values: Nx56K, Nx64KDefault: Nx64K

NOTICE: Start Channel, Number of Channels, and Channel Rate cannot be changed if Bundling is not also changed from “Arbitrary.”

Invert Clock In DTE Packet mode, this parameter changes the clock edge of the transmitted data. The Invert Clock parameter is only available for use in DTE mode, and DTE mode is only available for the Serial 2 port. Consequently, this configuration option only works for the Serial 2 port, and should remain disabled when configuring services for the Serial 1 port.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

Character Size Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.

Values: Five, Six, Seven, EightDefault: Eight

Tx Clock Selects the clock the unit uses to sample the data transmitted from the DTE. When set to “Internal,” the data is sampled directly with the transmit data

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-13

Page 46: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

clock that is also supplied to the DTE as Transmit Clock. The “External” option uses the external clock from the DTE.

Values: Internal, ExternalDefault: Internal

NOTICE: The “External” option is valid only in Packet mode.

Format Selects the port’s operating mode.

Values: Sync, AsyncDefault: Sync

Parity Sets the parity bit if the port is asynchronous.

Values: None, Odd, EvenDefault: None

Stop Bit Selects the number of bits required to end the character.

Values: 1, 2Default: 1

LL The Local Loopback parameter can be set to “Enable” or “Disable.” Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to go into Local Loop when the LL pin on the Serial 1 port goes high. The unit exits the loop when the LL pin goes low. If you select “Disable,” the unit ignores the LL pin on the Serial port.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

V.54 Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to respond to in-band V.54 loop codes. If you select “Disable,” the unit ignores these codes.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

CTS The Clear To Send parameter can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or “Internal.” If this parameter is set to “Internal,” the CTS control lead follows the RTS control lead from the DTE after a delay of a duration established by the RTS/CTS Delay parameter.

Values: Forced True, Forced False, InternalDefault: Forced True

DSR Data Set Ready can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or “Internal.” The “Internal” option sets DSR “On” if the port is enabled and “Off” if the port is disabled.

Values: Forced True, Forced False, InternalDefault: Forced True

DCD The Data Carrier Detect parameter can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or “Internal.” If set to “Internal,” DCD is “On” when network carrier

3-14 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 47: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

is being received from the remote end, and is “Off” when network carrier is not being received from the far end.

Values: Forced True, Forced False, InternalDefault: Forced True

RTS The Request To Send parameter determines the source from which the unit reads the RTS signal status. If set to “Normal,” the unit gets RTS from the DTE on the Serial interface. If set to “Forced True,” RTS is always perceived as “On.”

Values: Normal, Forced TrueDefault: Normal

RTS/CTS Delay The Request To Send/Clear To Send parameter determines how long the unit waits before it changes the level of CTS to match RTS when the CTS parameter is set to “Internal.”

Values: Normal (~30 ms delay), Long (~100 ms delay)Default: Normal

Flow Control Selects the type of flow control to be used if the port is asynchronous.

Values: None, Xon/Xoff, RTS/CTSDefault: None

Current Pin Status

The Current Pin Status, which shows the state of the RS-232 pins, is also displayed on the Serial interface screens.

DTR Alarm Control and Status Table

In addition to the configurable fields, the Serial screen displays a table that lets you set the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Alarm Control parameters and view the current DTR Alarm Status.

Choices for DTR Alarm Control are “Enable” and “Disable”; the default setting is “Disable.” Setting DTR Alarm Control to “Enable” allows the unit to go into alarm on a loss of DTR, which occurs when the Serial port detects that the DTR signal is low. The DTR Status field indicates the current state of the DTR alarm.

To make changes to any Serial port parameter, simply set the parameter to the desired selection and click the “Submit” button at the bottom of the screen.

10/100 Ethernet Screen (IP Service Details)The 10/100 Ethernet (IP Service Details) screen (Figure 3.10) lets you configure the IP parameters described below.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-15

Page 48: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.10 10/100 Ethernet (IP Service Details) Screen

Unit IP Address A unique network address assigned to this unit.

Subnet Mask Defines the network portion of the unit’s IP address.

Gateway IP Address IP address of the default gateway (router) on the LAN side of the unit.

DHCP Client If DHCP Client is enabled at power-up, the unit will request its IP, Mask, and Gateway addresses from a DHCP server located on the LAN side of the unit, and the unit will use these addresses. If the DHCP request is unsuccessful, the unit will use the configured addresses shown on this screen.

NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a 60-second timeout will occur.

Client Identifier Displays a unique identifier for a specific IP address.

Ethernet Enables or disables a remote unit’s Ethernet port.

Physical Address Displays unique MAC address.

NOTICE: If you manually change the IP address, you must “Save and Restart.” (See Save and Restart on page 3-4.) The first three address parameters above can also be configured using the Installation Wizard on page 2-2.

To view details about the current condition of IP, ICMP (In and Out), TCP, and UDP parameters, click the “Ethernet Stats” button at the bottom of the screen. The Ethernet Statistics screen (Figure 3.11) contains no user-selectable fields or options; it is simply a representation of the applicable MIB II parameters.

3-16 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 49: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.11 Ethernet Statistics Screen

Click on the Unit Access Table button on the Ethernet (IP Details) screen to view the Unit Access Table (Figure 3.12), which specifies up to 10 different IP networks that may access the unit’s parameters. If no IP networks are supplied, any host may access the unit. Select any Index number on the table to view the Unit Access Details (Figure 3.13) that correspond with that Index number.

Figure 3.12 Unit Access Table

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-17

Page 50: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.13 Unit Access Details

Supervisory ScreenThe Supervisory screen (Figure 3.14) displays the current speed of the Supervisory port interface and other parameters as described below.

Figure 3.14 Supervisory Screen

Speed Changes the Supervisory port speed (in bits per second).

Values: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200Default: 19200

Character Size Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.

Values: Five, Six, Seven, EightDefault: Eight

Diagnostic Messages Enables the Supervisory port to send out diagnostic messages upon power-up.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

NOTICE: When in SCADA mode, these diagnostic messages disrupt the connected device. Therefore, if using the SCADA mode, set this value to “Disable.”.

3-18 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 51: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

NOTICE: Diagnostic Messages must be set to “Enable” for the Verilink Configuration Wizard to work.

Parity Sets the parity bit.

Values: None, Odd, EvenDefault: None

Stop Bit Selects the number of bits required to end the character.

Values: 1, 2Default: 1

Current Pin Status

The Current Pin Status, which shows the state of the RS-232 pins, is also displayed on the Supervisory interface screen.

DTR Alarm Control and Status Table

In addition to the configurable fields, the Supervisory screen displays a table that lets you set the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Alarm Control parameters and view the current DTR Alarm Status.

Choices for DTR Alarm Control are “Enable” and “Disable”; the default setting is “Disable.” Setting DTR Alarm Control to “Enable” allows the unit to go into alarm on a loss of DTR, which occurs when the Serial port detects that the DTR signal is low. The DTR Status field indicates the current state of the DTR alarm.

Services ScreenThe Services screen (Figure 3.15) displays the unit’s defined services and the Interface, Type, Pair, and Status parameters for each service.

Figure 3.15 Services Screen

The Status for a particular service will display as one of the following:

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-19

Page 52: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

• Dead − The service is not functional because required resources are not available.

• Changed − The service parameter was changed and a Save and Restart is required for the service to function.

• Down − The service is not able to pass data because the physical layer is down.

• Physical Up − The service is not able to pass data because it has not completed any required negotiations.

• Up − The service is ready to pass data.

• Idle − The service has nothing to do.

The table in the center of the screen displays the available services listed by index number. To view more detailed information about a service, click on the index number associated with the desired service on the Services screen and then click on one of the user-activated “Details” buttons on the Service Details screen as described on page 3-22.

Data Line Monitor Configuration TableClick on the Data Line Monitor Config Table button at the top of the Service screen to view a screen that displays SCADA port information (Figure 3.16).

Figure 3.16 Data Line Monitor Config Table

Mode The two modes available are “Analyze” and “Live.” The Live mode lets you capture data and create a usable text file of the captured data. In Analyze mode, the packet switch will return the data via the Data Line Monitor Packet Table (see Figure 3.17) whereas in the Live mode the Data Line Monitor Packet Table will appear empty for SNMP calls.

Buffer Management Displays whether displayed data is set to “Wrap” or “Stop on Full.”

Service Indicates which service is being monitored.

Enable Displays whether capture is Enabled or Disabled.

Tx/Rx Filter Displays the direction of the captured data.

Pattern Filter Displays the Enable/Disable status of the Packet Filter.

Pattern Displays which specific pattern is being searched for.

3-20 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 53: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Pattern Mask Displays the bits the unit is looking for.

Pattern Offset Displays the offset in the packet that matches the pattern. If the offset is set to 255, the filter will search the packet for the pattern.

Click on the “Data Line Monitor Packet Table” button at the bottom of the screen to view the table that displays the captured data. The screen shows about 10 lines of active data, and if a line is selected, the screen will display further decoded data below.

Figure 3.17 Data Line Monitor Packet Table

The Data Line Monitor Details screen (Figure 3.18) is displayed by clicking the appropriate Services link on the Data Line Monitor Config Table screen. You use this screen to define the parameters listed above.

Figure 3.18 Data Line Monitor Details Screen

Adding a ServiceTo add a service, begin by clicking the “Add Service” button on the Services screen. A new service listed by the next incremental index number will appear

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-21

Page 54: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

on screen. The Interface for the newly added service will be “Unassigned.” To assign an interface for the new service, click on its index number, which will take you to the Service Details screen described below.

NOTICE: Any changes to settings in the Service Table require a “Save and Restart” for them to take effect.

Service Details ScreenClicking on an index number under the “Service Index” column on the Services screen will display a Service Details screen such as the one shown below (Figure 3.19). (In this example, the selected service type is Frame Relay.)

Figure 3.19 Service Details Screen

The Service Details screen lets you change for each service the parameters listed below.

* PPP is the only service that may be attached to the Virtual interface. You would choose the Virtual interface for PPP if you elected to run PPP over Frame Relay. When you attach PPP to the Virtual interface, you must supply an endpoint over which to send PPP encapsulated data, and that endpoint must be for a Frame Relay DLCI.

Parameter Options

Interface Unassigned, Supervisory, Network 1 or Network 2 (5160), Network (5130), Serial 1 or Serial 2 (5160), Serial (5130), 10/100 Ethernet, Virtual*

Type TDM, PPP, Frame Relay, IP, tty, SCADA

Pair User-assigned integer field that specifies where to route the traffic from this Service. If the Service is terminated by the unit, set this value to “0” (zero).

3-22 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 55: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

In addition, the Service Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Interface Details Button

Clicking the “Interface Details” button on the Service Details screen lets you view interface parameters for the selected service. You will also see the interface parameters for the selected service if you click on the interface under the “Interface” column on the Services screen.

Type Details Button

Clicking the “Type Details” button on the Service Details screen lets you view (and, in some cases, change) interface parameters for the specified service. The details displayed depend on the type of service currently in effect for the selected service. You will see this same screen if you click on the service under the “Type” column on the Services screen. Type Details screens for the various services are presented below.

Delete Service Button

Click the “Delete Service” button to remove the currently configured service identified by the Service Details screen. Deleting the selected service will remove all references to this service. These references may include frame relay, DLCI, endpoint, and Service Aware configurations.

After clicking the “Delete Service” button, you will be presented with a confirmation screen (Figure 3.20). Click the “Confirm Delete Service” button to confirm the removal of the selected service. To cancel, simply invoke your browser’s “Back” function.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Interface Details Opens the Details screen for the Interface of the currently selected service.

Type Details Opens the Details screen for the Type of the currently selected service.

Delete Service Opens the Verify Delete Service screen.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-23

Page 56: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.20 Confirm Delete Service Screen

DS0 Monitor Details Screen (5160 Only)To access the DS0 Monitor Details Screen (Figure 3.21), click on “TDM” in the Type column on the Service Details screen. This screen lets you configure what are considered high and low DS0 utilization parameters, and will report alarms if the monitored statistics rise above or fall below those specified settings. This helps determine customer load patterns so that channel bandwidth can be reallocated as necessary.

Figure 3.21 DS0 Monitor Details Screen

Number of DS0s Number of active DS0s (0−24) assigned on a per-service basis.

Alarm Reset Timer(sec)

Number of seconds that an alarm condition must not be present before an alarm is reset. Zero (0) indicates the Alarm Reset Timer is disabled.

Values: 0−900Default: 30

High Utilization % Lets you configure as a percent what is considered high utilization.

Values: 1−100Default: 100

3-24 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 57: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

High Threshold (sec) Lets you configure a high-utilization threshold (in seconds), above which an alarm will report.

Values: 0−900Default: 0 (Disabled)

End of Day LowUtilization %

Lets you configure as a percent what is considered low utilization at the end of the day. If the utilization is below this level when the day ends, an alarm reports.

Values: 0−100Default: 0 (Disabled)

DS0 Status and Alarm Table

Each second, the TDM services will count the number of active DS0s and update their statistics. This table also gives the status of the alarms (OK, Alarmed) related to DS0s.

The user-activated buttons listed below are at the bottom of the DS0 Monitor Details screen.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Clear Alarms Clears all utilization alarms.

Channels Displays the Channel Table details (Figure 3.22) for the Network, Network 1, or Network 2 service

DS0 24 Hour History Displays DS0 monitor history in 15-min buckets for the past 24 hours (Figure 3.23).

DS0 30 Day History Displays DS0 monitor history in 24-hr buckets for the past 30 days (Figure 3.24).

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-25

Page 58: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.22 Channel Table Details Screen

The Channel Table Details screen lets you establish the Rate, Service, and Idle Pattern parameters for any available channel. The screen parameters are described below.

Rate The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps.

Values: 56K, 64KDefault: 64K

Service Specifies the service to which this channel is allocated. Refer to the Service Table to see how the current services are configured.

Idle Pattern Selects the DS0 idle pattern sent by the unit and lets the unit determine if the DS0 idle pattern has been sent by the other end.

Values: 0−FF (Hex)Default: 7F

Figure 3.23 DS0 Monitor 24 Hour History Screen

3-26 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 59: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.24 DS0 Monitor 30 Day History Screen

The DS0 Monitor 24 Hour History and 30 Day History screens show the following statistics for the specified period.

Period Period for which the DS0 monitor history is displayed.

Timestamp System-up-time value during which the utilization historical period was completed.

% Utilization of DS0(s) Percent of DS0s utilized (−1, 0−100) over the period. A −1 indicates an invalid value or unavailable data.

High Utilization (sec) Number of seconds (0−900) greater than or equal to the high utilization parameter specified for the period in the utilization alarm table.

A “Clear History” button is also included on the 24 Hour and 30 Day History screens.

Frame Relay Service Details ScreenClick on “Frame Relay” under the “Type” column on the Services screen to access the Frame Relay Service Details screen (Figure 3.25). This screen lets you access the configuration parameters described in the paragraphs below.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-27

Page 60: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.25 Frame Relay Service Details Screen

Interface Type If this service is connected to a Frame Relay network, the Interface Type should be set to “UNI” as it is the user side of a User-to-Network interface. If it is connected to a FRAD/Router, the Interface Type should be set to “NI” as it is the network side of a User-to-Network interface. If it is connected to an equipment set for Network-to-Network interface, the Interface Type should be set to “NNI.”

Values: UNI, NI, NNIDefault: UNI if interface is Network, NI if interface is Serial

Link Management This parameter should be set to the link management used by the equipment connected to it. If set to “Auto,” the unit will learn the link management type and display it on the status portion of this screen.

Once it discovers the link management type, the unit should be set to the discovered value so that subsequent unit or network re-initialization will be faster.

Values: Auto, ANSI, CCITT, LMI, NoneDefault: ANSI

Max Frame Size If Auto Diagnostic is set to “Yes,” the unit will discard received frames that are larger than the maximum frame size. If Auto Diagnostic is set to “No,” these large received frames will be sent, but will be counted in the Rx Invalid statistics.

Values: 64–4096Default: 2500

3-28 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 61: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

N1 This counter indicates the number of “keep alive” status inquiries that are sent between full status requests.

Values: 5–255Default: 5 if interface is Network (UNI), 6 if interface is Serial (NI).

N2 The N2 counter specifies the total number of link reliability errors and protocol errors that can occur during the sliding event monitor count defined by N3. If this count is exceeded, the port is declared inactive.

Values: 1–255Default: 3

N3 This counter represents a Monitored Events Count. For a network, a monitored event is the receipt of a status inquiry message or the expiration of the polling verification timer T2. For a FRAD, a monitored event is the transmission of a status enquiry message. This parameter defines the size of the sliding window used by the unit to determine whether a channel or user device is active.

Values: 5–255Default: 4

T1 This parameter specifies the number of seconds the unit waits between issuing status inquiry messages.

Values: 5–30Default: 10

RFC1315 Trap When this parameter is set to “Enable,” the unit will send the standard RFC1315 frame relay DTE circuit state change trap every time a DLCI changes state, provided at least one destination IP address for trap is configured in the SNMP configuration.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

Normal Tx Queue Size Each Frame Relay service has two distinct transmit queues: one for normal-priority traffic and one for high-priority traffic. At this time, only SCADA and TCP Server traffic are considered high-priority and are placed in the high-priority queue. All other types of traffic are placed in the normal-priority queue.

This parameter defines how many normal priority frames can be put in front of a high-priority frame. The sofware always checks for high-priority frames before placing normal-priority frames in the transmit queue. However, once the frames are in the hardware transmit queue, their order of transmission cannot be changed.

If SCADA and/or TCP Server are not up, set this parameter to 28 (the default). If SCADA and/or TCP Server are up, set this parameter according to the SCADA host system’s ability to support higher latency. For example, if a SCADA host system has a timeout of 500 ms when polling remote devices through a DDS Frame Relay service, the Normal Tx Queue Size parameter should be set to 2. This would allow two 1500-byte IP frames to be sent

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-29

Page 62: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

between SCADA frames without reaching the 500-ms limit. If the SCADA host application has a timeout lower than 500 ms, this parameter should be set to 1. This then ensures a minimum latency for SCADA applications. However, it will slow IP traffic since only one IP frame at a time can be placed in the hardware transmit queue.

Default CIR (bps) This is the Committed Information Rate (in bits per second) provided by your frame relay service provider. The unit will apply this value to each DLCI learned from the network side to gather statistics and to perform CIR enforcement, if required. If a DLCI is configured with a CIR different from the default, the DLCI configuration will be used instead.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Default Be Rate (bps) This is the Excess Burst Rate (in bits per second) provided by your frame relay service provider. The unit will apply this value to each DLCI learned from the network side to gather statistics and to perform CIR enforcement, if required. If a DLCI is configured with a different Excess Burst from the default, the DLCI configuration will be used instead.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Enforce CIR and Be If this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will enforce Committed Information Rate and Excess Burst.

Values: No, YesDefault: No

NOTICE: The Auto Diagnostic parameter must be set to “Yes” to enforce CIR and Be.

Management DLCI If there is a DLCI entered (and submitted) in this field, it will be the only DLCI that looks for in-band management packets. If a value of “0” (zero) is entered in this field, all DLCIs will look for management packets.

Management Auto IPDLCI

If this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will monitor the specified management DLCI for 5 pings over 5 seconds, after which the unit uses the destination address as its management IP address.

FrameStart AutoDiagnostic

When this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will always source LMI on both sides of the frame relay connection. The unit will dynamically learn the type of link management used on each side of the connection (Network and Serial).

When set to “No,” the unit will monitor LMI between the Serial and the Network port. If one side of the connection goes down, it will source LMI until the connection goes back up, and will automatically go back to Monitor mode once both sides are up. In Monitor mode, the unit will switch all frames received between the network and the serial port regardless of the number of DLCIs or frame size.

3-30 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 63: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

FrameStart Auto Diagnostic mode should be left set to “Yes” unless the frame relay connection has more that 128 DLCIs, or if there is a very high traffic rate on a constant basis.

Values: No, YesDefault: Yes

NOTICE: If either side of the Frame Relay connection goes down, you will be unable to remotely access any connected units.

FrameStart AutoDiscovery

When this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will send FrameStart discovery and delay frames to each DLCI it learns as soon as the DLCIs are set active. This is required to calculate round trip delay as well as to discover remote WANsuite 5160/5130/FST/FSD units. This parameter should be set to “Yes” only on network services that have a WANsuite 5160/5130/FST/FSD at the far end of the frame relay connection. Also if set to “Yes,” the unit will gather SLA parameters such as frame and data delivery ratio as defined in the Frame Relay Forum Implementation, FRF.13. Those gathered statistics are then displayed on the DLCI Statistics screen as shown on page 3-49.

Values: No, YesDefault: No

Round Trip Delay Size(bytes)

Specifies the frame size (in bytes) of packets making the round-trip.

Round Trip Delay Rate(secs)

Specifies the rate (in seconds) at which Round Trip Delay packets are sent.

Status and Alarms Table

The table displayed at the bottom of the Frame Relay Service Details screen reports on the status and condition of LMI parameters and on Receive/Transmit alarms and thresholds. Alarm threshold levels may be changed by entering a new threshold value in the appropriate field of the table and clicking the “Submit” button. Table fields are described below.

Active Read-only field shows whether or not (Yes or No) an alarm is active.

LMI Type Read-only status indicates ANSI, CCITT, LMI rev. 1, or Unknown.

FrameStart Status Read-only status indicates Sourcing, Monitoring, or 0.

Rx Invalid Threshold Number of invalid frames received during a 15-minute interval after which an invalid alarm will be triggered. Default of “0” disables this alarm.

Rx Invalid Alarm Status of this alarm indicates OK or Alarmed.

Tx Threshold Number of bits per second sent during a 15-minute interval after which a Tx alarm will be triggered. Default of 0 disables this alarm.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-31

Page 64: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Tx Alarm Status of this alarm indicates OK or Alarmed.

Rx Threshold Number of bits per second sent during a 15-minute interval after which an Rx alarm will be triggered. Default of 0 disables this alarm.

Rx Alarm Status of this alarm indicates OK or Alarmed.

The Frame Relay Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

NOTICE: When a “Submit” command is executed, the Frame Relay link will be re-initialized with the new parameters, causing a brief interruption in data transfer.

Frame Relay Port Statistics Screen

Clicking the “Frame Relay Statistics” button brings up a table (Figure 3.26) that reports on the status and condition of LMI parameters and on Receive/Transmit alarms and thresholds. Alarm threshold levels may be changed by entering a new threshold value in the appropriate field on the Frame Relay Service Details screen and clicking the “Submit” button.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Frame Relay Statistics Opens the Frame Relay Port Statistics screen for the current Frame Relay service.

DLCI Table Opens the DLCI Table screen, which displays all the DLCIs on the current service. Refer to DLCI Table Screen on page 3-50 for more information.

Clear Alarms Clears all Frame Relay alarms.

3-32 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 65: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.26 Frame Relay Port Statistics Screen

Transmit

Frames Number of frames transmitted by the port.

Octets Number of octets transmitted by the port.

Mgmt Frames Number of management frames transmitted by the port.

Mgmt Octets Number of management octets transmitted by the port.

Stat Inquiries Number of octets transmitted in frame relay LMI status inquiries.

Stat Responses Number of octets transmitted in frame relay LMI status responses.

Receive

Frames Number of frames received by the port.

Octets Number of octets received by the port.

Mgmt Frames Number of management frames received by the port.

Mgmt Octets Number of management octets received by the port.

FECN Number of Forward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received.

BECN Number of Backward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received.

Invalids Number of invalid frames received.

Stat Inquiries Number of octets received in frame relay LMI status inquiries.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-33

Page 66: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Stat Responses Number of octets received in frame relay LMI status responses.

Invalid LMIs Number of invalid Local Management Interface frames received.

Throughput (bits/sec)

Peak Peak bandwidth (in bps) as measured over a 10-second period.

Average Average bandwidth (in bps) used by the port.

Period Index Selects the interval (Current, Summary, or 1-96) to be viewed on the Frame Relay Port Statistics screen.

The Frame Relay Port Statistics screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

SCADA Details Screen

NOTICE: SCADA traffic has a higher priority than other types of traffic flowing through the unit. Refer to Normal Tx Queue Size on page 3-29 for more details.

Click on “SCADA” under the “Type” column on the Services screen to view the SCADA Details screen (Figure 3.27). This menu gives you access to the configuration parameters described in the paragraphs below.

Figure 3.27 SCADA Details Screen

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

All Frame Relay Intervals

Opens the Frame Relay Statistics screen that shows all statistics for all parameters.

Type Details Returns you to the Frame Relay Service Details screen.

Clear Stats Clears all Frame Relay statistics.

3-34 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 67: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Message Size Maximum number of characters to buffer before sending a frame.

Values: 0−1024Default: 256

Idle Character Delay Maximum number of idle character time to wait before sending a frame.

Values: 0−65535Default: 10

Input Terminator Decimal value of the character that terminates a message before sending a frame.

Values: 0−255Default: 0

Data Direction Data direction that the port will support. If set to “Input,” the port will only accept incoming data and will not transmit data. If set to “Output,” the port will ignore any incoming data. If set to “Both,” the port will process all data.

Values: Input, Output, BothDefault: Both

SCADA Loopback Determines if and where SCADA will loopback received data.

Values: None, Loopback to Network, Loopback to PortDefault: None

The table below these parameters displays the SCADA statistics.

The SCADA Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Figure 3.28 SCADA Device List Screen

Select the appropriate numbered link under the “Device column to access the SCADA Device Details screen(Figure 3.29) where you can map SCADA devices to endpoints.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

SCADA Device List Displays a table that shows the mapping between SCADA devices and endpoints (Figure 3.28).

Clear SCADA Statistics Clears all SCADA statistics.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-35

Page 68: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.29 SCADA Device Details Screen

PPP Service Details ScreenClick on “PPP” under the “Type” column on the Services screen to view the PPP Service Details screen (Figure 3.30). This menu gives you access to the configuration parameters described in the paragraphs below.

Figure 3.30 PPP Service Details Screen

ACCM The Asynchronous Control Character Map (ACCM) configuration option provides a method to negotiate the use of control character transparency on asynchronous links.

Values: 0–FFFFFFFF (Hex)Default: FFFFFFFF

3-36 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 69: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

MRU The Maximum Receive Units configuration option may be set to inform the peer that the implementation can receive larger packets, or to request that the peer send smaller packets.

Values: 128–4096Default: 1500

Port IP Address The IP Address of the port. For unnumbered PPP link, set to 0.0.0.0 and set IP Address Negotiation to “No.”

Default: 192.168.1.2

Peer IP Address The IP address of the peer that will negotiate authentication protocols.

Default: 192.168.1.3

Virtual PPP over Endpoint name over which to send PPP encapsulated data (i.e., PPP over Frame Relay). Valid only when the PPP interface is Virtual.

Auth ChallengeInterval

The time interval (in seconds) between CHAP challenges. A value of “0” (zero) disables the periodic authentication challenge.

Values: 0−3600Default: 0 (disabled)

Initiate Negotiation Determines whether the port actively negotiates with the peer site or passively waits for negotiation requests.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: Yes

Allow PAP Lets the peer to negotiate for PAP.

Values: No, YesDefault: No

Allow CHAP Lets the peer to negotiate for CHAP.

Values: No, YesDefault: No

PAP Username This field is used to log on to the peer. Type the appropriate PAP Username in this field.

Values: User establishedDefault: Username

PAP Password Enter the password necessary to log on to the peer under a given PAP Username.

Values: User establishedDefault: None

CHAP Username Type the appropriate CHAP Hostname in this field.

Values: User establishedDefault: Hostname

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-37

Page 70: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

CHAP Secret Enter the Secret (i.e., password) necessary to challenge the peer.

Values: User establishedDefault: Secret

Parameters To Negotiate

The table displayed near the bottom of the PPP Service Details screen shows which parameters are set to be negotiated. You can specify which parameters should be negotiated by clicking on the pull-down menu next to each parameter and selecting the desired option. Parameters that can be negotiated are described below.

PPP Statistics

Clicking the “PPP Statistics” button brings up a table (Figure 3.26) that reports on traffic.

Parameter Description

Protocol Header Compression

Compresses PPP protocol headers.Default = Yes

IPCP (IP Control Protocol) Compression

Compresses TCP headers using Van Jacobsen compression. Default = Yes

MRU (Maximum Receive Units)

Informs the peer that the implementation can receive larger packets, or to request that the peer send smaller packets.Default = Yes

HDLC Address Compression

Provides a method to negotiate the compression of high-level data link control (HDLC) addresses.Default = Yes

IP Address Dynamically negotiates for IP addresses; otherwise, it is assumed both sides know each other’s IP addresses.Default = Yes

ACCM Negotiates the use of control character transparency on asynchronous links. Default = Yes

Magic Number Unique numbers useful for detecting loopbacks.Default = Yes

PAP (Password Authentication Protocol)

An authentication scheme used by PPP servers to validate the identity of the originator of the connection. Default = No

CHAP (Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol)

An authentication scheme used by PPP servers to validate the identity of the originator of the connection upon connection or any time later.Default = No

3-38 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 71: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.31 PPP Statistics Screen

Transmit

Frames Number of frames transmitted by the port.

Octets Number of octets transmitted by the port.

Mgmt Frames Number of management frames transmitted by the port.

Mgmt Octets Number of management octets transmitted by the port.

Receive

Frames Number of frames received by the port.

Octets Number of octets received by the port.

Mgmt Frames Number of management frames received by the port.

Mgmt Octets Number of management octets received by the port.

Invalids Number of invalid frames received.

Throughput (bits/sec)

Peak Peak bandwidth (in bps) as measured over a 10-second period.

Average Average bandwidth (in bps) used by the port.

Period Index Selects the interval (Current, Summary, or 1-96) to be viewed on the PPP Statistics screen.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-39

Page 72: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The PPP Statistics screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

PAP Table

At the bottom of the PPP Services Details screen are two buttons that display tables for PAP and CHAP details. The PAP Table (Figure 3.32) displays the Usernames and Passwords for 10 entries.

Figure 3.32 PAP Table Screen

Select an Index number and click the “PAP Details” button at the bottom of this screen to bring up a PAP Details screen (Figure 3.33) in which you can view, change, or delete the Username and Password for that particular PAP Index.

Figure 3.33 PAP Details Screen

To change the Username and Password for a selected PAP Index (PAP: 1 in the example above), enter the new information in the appropriate fields and click the “Submit” button.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

All PPP Intervals Opens the PPP Stats screen that shows all statistics for all parame-ters.

Type Details Returns you to the PPP Service Details screen.

Clear Stats Clears all PPP statistics.

3-40 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 73: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

To delete the Username and Password for a selected PAP Index, delete the character string displayed in both fields (leaving them blank) and click the “Submit” button.

The “Type Details” button returns you to the PPP Type Details screen.

CHAP Table

From the PPP Service Details screen, click the “CHAP Table” button to view a table (Figure 3.34) of the CHAP Username and Secret information for each of 10 entries.

Figure 3.34 CHAP Table Screen

Select an Index number and click the “CHAP Details” button at the bottom of this screen to bring up a screen in which you can change the Username and Secret for that particular CHAP Index.

Figure 3.35 CHAP Details Screen

To change the Username and Secret for a selected CHAP Index, enter the new information in the appropriate fields and click the “Submit” button.

The “Type Details” button returns you to the PPP Type Details screen.

IP Service Details ScreenThe IP Service Details screen and Ethernet Stats screens are described earlier in this chapter on in page 3-16 and page 3-17, respectively.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-41

Page 74: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

ApplicationsThe Applications screens describe configuration tables and statistics for Layer 3 and above that do not map to a specific service or interface.

Endpoint Table ScreenThe Endpoint Table (Figure 3.36) describes all endpoints terminating in the unit; links are provided to view the Endpoint Details, Endpoint Service Details, and Endpoint DLCI Details screens. The unit will automatically learn all DLCIs from the Network side and relay that information on the Serial side with default values.

The Endpoint Table and its corresponding DLCIs will be saved in the configuration database only after at least one endpoint parameter has been changed and submitted in the Endpoint Details screen (page 3-42).

NOTICE: The Endpoint Table and its corresponding DLCIs will be saved in the configuration database only after at least one endpoint parameter has been changed and submitted in the Endpoint Details Screen on page 3-43. When in IP Gateway, if you decide to use a “discovered” endpoint, you must rename it. A discovered endpoint cannot be used elsewhere (i.e., IP Gateway) until it has been renamed. Also, it will not be saved in the configuration database.

NOTICE: Endpoint names of the form PPP-Sn and SCADA-Sn are reserved by the system. These system-generated endpoints cannot be modified.

Figure 3.36 Endpoint Table Screen

For most applications, you will not have to modify the Endpoint Table and DLCI Table. Modification is necessary, however, to configure remote in-band management. (See In Band Management on page 3-46.)

Endpoint Details Screen

The Endpoint Details screen (Figure 3.37), which you access by clicking on an Index number on the Endpoint Table, lets you access the configuration parameters described in the paragraphs below.

3-42 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 75: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.37 Endpoint Details Screen

Name When the unit learns a new DLCI, it creates an endpoint entry and a DLCI entry if they are not already configured. The endpoint’s Name will automatically be assigned as “Dynamic”; however, this name can (and most likely should) be changed to reflect a remote location name. Submitting a changed Name parameter will cause the endpoint entry and its corresponding DLCI entry to be saved in the configuration database.

Value: A string of up to 11 characters Default: None

CAUTION: When configuring endpoints, the name you assign each endpoint in the Name parameter field must be unique within the unit.

Service The Service Index number (from the Service Table) on which this DLCI was found or configured.

Values: Displays the currently active Services (by index number) or the Service(s) on which the DLCI was discovered.

Default: 0

DLCI The DLCI number.

Values: 16–1023Default: 0

Forward Endpoint By default, each DLCI is switched to its pair service in the Service Table using the same DLCI number. If this endpoint has to be switched to a different DLCI or a different service, the endpoint index of the destination must be configured here.

For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.

Values: 0–256Default: 0

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-43

Page 76: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Backup Endpoint If this DLCI has an alternative endpoint to switch to in case this DLCI becomes inactive, you would configure the endpoint index of this alternative endpoint here.

For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.

Values: 0–256Default: 0

SLP ReferenceEndpoint

This is the reference endpoint index to use for the SLA parameters. As most applications have the same SLAs for all DLCIs, they need to be configured in only one DLCI entry. All SLA parameters can then be copied from the endpoint index of this configured DLCI. If no SLP reference endpoint is configured and the DLCI SLA parameters are not configured, the values in the Frame Relay Service Details will be used (default CIR, Be, enforcement).

For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.

Values: 0–256Default: 0

Remote IP Address If this WANsuite 5160/5130 unit is to be used to manage a remote WANsuite 5160/5130 unit, the IP address of the remote WANsuite 5160/5130 unit must be configured here. This DLCI can be used for management only, or for management and actual data.

If this parameter is set, a PC connected to the LAN interface of this WANsuite 5160/5130 can reach a remote WANsuite 5160/5130 through this DLCI. The remote IP address must be part of an IP network that is different from the local WANsuite 5160/5130, and the local WANsuite 5160/5130's IP address must be configured into the PC. This way, local and remote WANsuite 5160/5130s can be reached regardless of the availability of the routers connected at the back of the WANsuite 5160/5130s.

Values: IP addressDefault: 0.0.0.0

Remote IP Mask If the Remote IP Address is set, the Remote IP Mask must also be set.

Values: IP addressDefault: 0.0.0.0

Type If data received from this DLCI has to be switched to its corresponding destination port, the type must be set to “Switched.” The type should be set to “Local” for any DLCI that is used for management purposes only.

Values: Switched, LocalDefault: Switched

New DLCI This field is used to create a new DLCI if it is not already configured. To create a new DLCI, enter a valid DLCI number in the field and click the “Submit” button. The new DLCI number will be reflected in the DLCI field of the Endpoint Details screen.

3-44 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 77: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The Endpoint Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Endpoint Service Details Screen

Clicking on the “Service Details” button at the bottom of the Endpoint Table screen displays the typical Service Details screen. Refer to Service Details Screen on page 3-22 for a complete description of this type of screen.

DLCI Details Screen

The DLCI Details screen (Figure 3.38) lets you access the configuration parameters described in the paragraphs below. To bring up this screen, click on a specific DLCI under the “DLCI” column on the Endpoint Table screen, or on the “DLCI Details” button on the Endpoint Details screen.

Figure 3.38 DLCI Details Screen

The unit uses the first three configuration parameters (Protocol Encapsulation, Proprietary Traffic Type, and Proprietary Offset) to gather statistics. For in-band management, “RFC 1490” must be the encapsulation method.

Protocol Encapsulation Type of encapsulation used by the FRAD/Router connected to the unit.

Values: RFC 1490, ProprietaryDefault: RFC 1490

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Service Details Opens the Service details screen showing the selected service's settings.

DLCI Details Displays details of the selected DLCI.

Delete Endpoint Deletes the currently displayed endpoint.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-45

Page 78: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Proprietary TrafficType

When Protocol Encapsulation is set for “Proprietary,” the Proprietary Traffic Type parameter defines which protocol is encapsulated.

Values: IP, IPX, Ethertype, NoneDefault: None

Proprietary Offset When Protocol Encapsulation is set for “Proprietary,” the Proprietary Offset parameter defines the number of octets after the frame relay header where the proprietary traffic type starts.

Values: 0–64Default: 0

CIR (bps) If a Committed Information Rate is configured here, its value will be used instead of the default CIR of the Frame Relay service.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Be (bps) If an Excess Burst Rate is configured here, its value will be used instead of the default excess burst of the Frame Relay service.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Bc (bps) If CIR enforcement is configured to “Yes,” the unit will throttle the committed burst down to this value when frames are received with the BECN bit set.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Discard Eligible Flag If this parameter is set to “Yes” and CIR enforcement is also set to “Yes,” the unit will set the Discard Eligible (DE) bit for frames sent over CIR.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

In Band Management If the unit is to be used as a gateway to reach a remote WANsuite 5160/5130 through this DLCI, this parameter should be set to “Yes,” and the remote IP address and Mask should be configured in the corresponding endpoint.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

FrameStart Delay If this parameter is set to “Enable,” the unit will send FrameStart discovery and delay frames on this DLCI, and will report the state of the remote Verilink unit with FrameStart technology. It will also send SOS frames when the FRAD/router connected to this unit goes inactive.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable if Auto Discovery is set to “Yes”; Disable otherwise

FrameStart Status If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology and FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, the FrameStart Status field will show the status of the remote unit. The status is “Active” if both the local and remote DLCIs are active and the remote unit answers to the discovery frames

3-46 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 79: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

sent by this unit. The status is “SOS” if the remote unit is active but the FRAD/Router connected to it is inactive. The status is “Inactive” in all other cases.

Values: Active, Inactive, SOSDefault: Inactive

Remote DLCI If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology, and FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, this displays the DLCI number used on the remote end of this DLCI.

Values: 16−1023Default: 0

Remote Unit If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology, and FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, this parameter gives the first three digits of the unit ID configured on the remote end of this DLCI.

Values: 000−999Default: 000

Remote Unit IPAddress

Displays the IP address of the remote Verilink unit with FrameStart technology if FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled.

Round Trip Delay Size(bytes)

Specifies the frame size (in bytes) of packets making the round-trip. If the Round Trip Delay Size is not configured, the Frame Relay Details values will be used.

Round Trip Delay Rate(secs)

Specifies the rate (in seconds) at which Round Trip Delay packets are sent. If the Round Trip Delay Rate is not configured, the Frame Relay Details values will be used.

DLCI Status TableThe bottom portion of the screen displays a table detailing the actual status of DLCI and alarm threshold information as follows:

Status If this DLCI is up, the status will be “Active”; otherwise, the status will be “Inactive.”

Values: Active, InactiveDefault: Inactive

Receiving FECN/BECN

When a frame is received with congestion bit set, this parameter is set to “Yes.” It is set back to “No” when a frame is received without congestion bit set.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

CIR Threshold Sets the Tx over CIR alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of bits per second in excess of CIR during a 15-minute interval. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-47

Page 80: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

CIR Alarm Reports if the Tx over CIR threshold has been exceeded.

Bits Over Be Threshold Sets the Tx over Be alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of bits per second in excess of CIR + Be during a 15-minute interval. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm.

Bits Over Be Alarm Reports if the Tx over Be threshold has been exceeded.

Congestion Threshold Sets the Rx Congestion alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of frames received with BECN/FECN. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm.

Congestion Alarm Reports if the Rx Congestion threshold has been exceeded.

BECN in CIR Reports if Backward Explicit Congestion Notification (BECN) has been received within CIR.

UAS Threshold Sets the Unavailable Seconds (UAS) alarm threshold. This threshold occurs after the DLCI is unavailable for a specified number of seconds. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm.

UAS Alarm Reports if the UAS threshold has been exceeded.

The DLCI Details screen provides the user-activated buttons defined below.

DLCI Statistics Screen

Clicking the “DLCI Statistics” button on the DLCI Details screen will display a summary (Figure 3.39) of the Transmit, Receive, and Performance statistics for the selected DLCI for a specific period.

Button Function

Submit Sets and activates newly defined DLCI parameters.

Clear Alarms Clears all DLCI alarms.

DLCI Statistics Displays a table of the statistics for this DLCI.

DLCI Table Displays a table of all DLCIs on a specific frame relay service, with their state and alarm conditions.

3-48 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 81: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.39 DLCI Statistics Screen

There are ninety-six 15-minute buckets (sampled every second) available for DLCI statistics. If the unit is powered on at 01:00 PM, the first interval will be completed at 01:15 PM; subsequent intervals would be completed at xx:30, xx:45, xx:00 and xx:15. Interval 1 is always the latest (most recent) interval, and interval 96 will always be the oldest.

The DLCI Statistics screen in the preceding figure shows a summary that includes all 96 buckets. You can choose to see the statistics for any given bucket by selecting the desired Period Index from the pull-down menu and clicking the “Submit” button. Alternatively, you can display all intervals at once by clicking the “All DLCI Intervals” button beneath the table. The MIB (ipadv2.mib) describes each available statistic. “FDR” on the screen above refers to Frame Delivery Ratio, which is the ration of successful frame receptions to attempted frame transmissions. “DDR” refers to Data Delivery Ratio or the ratio of successful payload bytes received to attempted payload bytes transmitted. “DE,” or Discard Eligible, refers to the data that is first eligible to be discarded when network congestion occurs.

DLCI Table Screen

Clicking the “DLCI Table” button on the DLCI Details screen will display a table of all DLCIs (Figure 3.40) on a specific frame relay service along with their state and alarm conditions.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-49

Page 82: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.40 DLCI Table Screen

NOTICE: The DLCI Table and DLCI Details screens are available from both the Endpoint Table and the Frame Relay Service Details screens.

Service Aware ScreenThe Service Aware function recognizes IP traffic and counts the number of frames and bytes passed for a specific service based on filters by DLCI, by IP Address, and by IP Port. Each row of the Service Aware table represents a specific set of filter parameters known as a “rule.” Each rule is established through the Rule Details screen, which is accessed by clicking on theappropriate numbered link under the “Index column on the Service Aware screen.

The Service Aware screen (Figure 3.41) provides a table showing these filtered packet counts for up to 10 rules. This table indicates which Service Aware filters are enabled or disabled, and shows the specific DLCI, IP Address, and IP Port by which the IP traffic is filtered. In addition, this table shows the Tx Alarm Threshold and the current Tx Alarm status (if enabled) for each rule.

It is also possible to filter PPP services, in which case all information related to DLCIs is ignored.

3-50 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 83: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.41 Service Aware Screen

NOTICE: If you change the Service parameter, you must click on “Submit” to see the appropriate DLCIs.

The Service Aware screen provides a “Clear Alarms” user-activated button at the bottom of the screen.

Rule Details Screen

Use the Rule Details screen (Figure 3.42) to establish Service Aware parameters. To access the screen, click on the appropriate number under the “Index” column on the Service Aware screen. To establish a rule, you must select the desired rule configuration options and provide the appropriate filter information where required. Then press the “Submit” button at the bottom of the screen.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-51

Page 84: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.42 Rule Details Screen

The paragraphs below describe the Rule Details screen parameters and their options.

Service Selects the service to which the rule applies. Select from a pull-down list of available services.

NOTICE: If you change the Service parameter, you must click on “Submit” to see the appropriate DLCIs.

DLCI Selects the DLCI to which the rule applies from a pull-down list of applicable DLCIs.

Filter By DLCI Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the DLCI specified in the DLCI pull-down list.

NOTICE: To use this filter, you must specify both the Service and DLCI parameters in the rule configuration.

IP Address Establishes the IP address by which the rule will filter IP traffic (if enabled).

IP Mask Represents a range of IP addresses defined so that only machines with IP addresses within the range defined by the mask are allowed to access an Internet service. To mask a portion of the IP address, replace it with the wild card character “0” (zero). (For example, 192.44.0.0 represents every computer on the Internet with an IP address beginning with 192.44.)

Filter By IP Address Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the IP address specified in the IP Address or IP Mask field.

IP Port Establishes the IP port by which the rule will filter IP traffic (if enabled).

3-52 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 85: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Filter By IP Port Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the IP port specified in the IP Port field.

Tx Alarm Threshold Specifies the threshold in octets for the Transmit Alarm on this rule.

Tx Alarm Shows the current Transmit Alarm status.

IP Port List Provides a drop-down list of well-known port IDs for TCP and UDP. To enter a port ID, select an option from the list and click the “Enter” button. The selected port ID value will then be reflected in the IP Port field.

Traffic Meter Statistics Screen

The Traffic Meter Statistics screen (Figure 3.43) displays a summary of the number of frames and octets sent over a DLCI that have been counted in accordance with the Service Aware “rule” established for a Service. As such, it is Frame Relay specific (i.e., DLCIs only occur in Frame Relay links). In addition, this screen provides data rate performance information for the period of time specified in the Period Index field (see below). To access this screen, click on the appropriate link under the “Statistics” column on the Service Aware screen.

Figure 3.43 Traffic Meter Statistics Screen

The Traffic Meter Statistics screen reports on the following parameters:

• Tx Frames

• Tx Octets

• Rx Frames

• Rx Octets

• Rate Peak – the peak data rate for the viewed period (see below)

• Rate Average – the average data rate for the viewed period (see below)

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-53

Page 86: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The Period Index field is used to define the period of time for which the Traffic Meter statistics will be reported. It represents the 24-hour, 15-minute buckets index. Selecting a period and then clicking the “Submit” button will display the Traffic Meter Statistics for that period. Clicking on the “All Traffic Meter Intervals” at the bottom of the screen displays the Traffic Meter Statistics for all intervals as defined below.

Summary Represents the past 24 hours; reports the additive number of frames/octets, the highest peak encountered for 24 hours, and the average for 24 hours.

Current Reports on the current 15-minute interval.

Interval 1, Interval 2,..., Interval 96

Reports on intervals 1-96 that correspond to the periods completed 15 minutes ago, 30 minutes ago, ..., 24 hours ago.

SNMP Details ScreenThe unit detects and reports T1 network alarms and provides several options for reporting them, one of which is SNMP traps. When a network alarm occurs, the unit sends a trap message to as many as eight destinations on your network. The unit will report each alarm by transmitting an SNMP “trap” to each non-zero Trap IP address. The SNMP Details screen (Figure 3.44) lets you configure the SNMP parameters described in the paragraphs below.

Figure 3.44 SNMP Details Screen

Read Community Accepts a character string identifying the group authorized to perform read operations. The default setting is “Public.”

Write Community Accepts a character string identifying the group authorized to perform write operations. The default setting is “Private.”

Trap Community Accepts a character string, which is included in SNMP traps generated by the unit. The default setting is “Public.”

Trap IP Address Accepts the IP address of a network device where alarm reporting traps are to be sent.

3-54 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 87: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Diagnostics ScreenThe Diagnostics screen (Figure 3.45) provides a table for viewing the current settings for the test and maintenance functions performed on the available interfaces. This screen shows an upper-level view of all the interfaces so you can see if any port is under test, and, if so, view the results. You may change Diagnostic parameters on the Test Details screen, which is accessed by clicking on the appropriate link on the Diagnostics screen. The properties of the Diagnostics table are described in the paragraphs below.

Figure 3.45 Diagnostics Screen

Description Describes the type of interface selected for testing.

Loop Type Describes the type of loop test (if any) performed on the selected interface.

Setting Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT.

Pattern Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a BERT for the selected port.

Length Displays the length of time for which the BERT should run for the selected interface.

State Displays the current BERT state for the selected interface.

Elapsed Time Displays the time elapsed since a BERT began or, if completed, the total test time.

BE Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the BERT began or since error statistics were last cleared.

ES Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds detected since the BERT began or since error statistics were last cleared. This parameter includes bit error seconds and sync loss seconds.

% EFS Displays what percent of the total BERT time ran error free. This ratio is derived from the number of error-free seconds divided by the number of seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.

Test Details Screens

The Test Details screens let you set some test parameters and view other read-only parameters. This screen is also used to initiate a BERT or Loop Test.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-55

Page 88: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The Network Interface Test Details screen is shown in Figure 3.46, and its parameters are described below the figure. The Serial Interface Test Details screen is shown in Figure 3.47, followed by a description of its parameters.

Figure 3.46 Network Interface Test Details Screen

BERT Table on Network Interface Test Details Screen

The BERT table provided on the Test Details screen lets you set the test parameters listed below.

Setting Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT. The available values for this parameter depend on which interface is selected.

Values: Idle Channels, Channel 1...24, Net, Use ServiceDefault: Net

Service Selects the channels with a service to BERT. (Refer to Figure 3.15 on page 3-19.)

Channel Rate Sets the bit rate to BERT for each selected channel. If “Νx64K” is selected, the ones density requirements of the T1 network line must be ensured. If “Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0 channel is maintained.

Values: Nx56K, Nx64KDefault: Nx64K

BERT Pattern Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a test for the selected port.

Values: Marks, QRSS, 511, 2047, 215, SpacesDefault: QRSS

NOTICE: The 215 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.

3-56 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 89: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Test Duration Specifies the length of time for which the test should run for the selected port.

Values: 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours, ContinuousDefault: 15 minutes

You can also view the following read-only parameters from this screen:

Pattern Sync Displays the state of pattern sync during a test. If no test is in progress, “No Test” is displayed. If a test is active, but the receiver is not in pattern sync, “No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is displayed.

Elapsed Time Displays the time elapsed since a timed test began or, if completed, the total test time.

Bit Errors Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the test began or since error statistics were cleared.

Errored Seconds Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds that have been detected since the test began or since error statistics were last cleared.

%EFS Displays the percentage of time the test ran error-free. This ratio is derived from the number of error free seconds divided by the number of seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.

Loop Table on Network Interface Test Details Screen

The types of tests available for you to choose from depend on the currently selected interface. For the Network interface, the Loop table provided near the bottom of the Test Details screen lets you specify the type of Loop test to be performed.Loopback diagrams are shown in Appendix A, Figure A.1.

Values: No Test (Loop Down), payload loopback (PLB), line loopback (LLB), maintenance loopback (MLB), Far PLB, Far LLB

Default: No Test (Loop Down)

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-57

Page 90: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.47 Serial Interface Test Details Screen

BERT Table on Serial Interface Test Details Screen

The BERT table lets you set the test parameters listed below.

Setting Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT. The available values for this parameter depend on which interface is selected.

Values: Net, DTEDefault: Net

BERT Pattern Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a test for the selected port.

Values: Marks, QRSS, 511, 2047, 215, SpacesDefault: QRSS

NOTICE: The 215 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.

Test Duration Specifies the length of time for which the test should run for the selected port.

Values: 15 min, 30 min, 1 hour, 24 hours, ContinuousDefault: 15 min

You can also view the following read-only parameters from this screen:

Pattern Sync Displays the state of pattern sync during a test. If no test is in progress, “No Test” is displayed. If a test is active, but the receiver is not in pattern sync, “No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is displayed.

Elapsed Time Displays the time elapsed since a timed test began or, if completed, the total test time.

Bit Errors Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the test began or since error statistics were cleared.

3-58 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 91: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Errored Seconds Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds that have been detected since the test began or since error statistics were last cleared.

% EFS Displays the percentage of time the test ran error-free. This ratio is derived from the number of error free seconds divided by the number of seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.

Loop Table on Serial Interface Test Details Screen

The Loop table provided near the bottom of the Test Details screen lets you specify the type of Loop test to be performed. The types of tests available for you to choose from depend on the currently selected interface. Loopback diagrams are shown in Appendix A, Figure A.1.

Values: No Test, Port Loop, V.54 Loop, Far V.54 LoopDefault: No Test (Loop Down)

The Test Details screens provide the following user-activated buttons:

Trap Log ScreenThe Trap Log screen (Figure 3.48) shows a collection of all the traps that have been generated. A trap is a mechanism that permits a device to send an alarm for certain network events to an SNMP management station; in other words, traps are notifications of triggered alarms.

The table shown in this screen lists each trap by its Index number, and displays the type of error captured by the trap (Trap Number), the date and time the trap was stored (Time Stamp), its description, and its value.

To remove all trap information stored in memory, click the “Delete All Traps” button.

Button Function

Start Starts the specified BERT.

Stop Stops the currently running BERT.

Error Inject Injects a bit error.

Reset Errors Resets the current error count.

Loop Submit Sets the type of Loop test.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-59

Page 92: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.48 Trap Log Screen

Top TalkersClicking on the Top Talkers link in the navigation tree displays a screen (Figure 3.49) where you can set parameters for and initiate the generation of a list of IP addresses ranked in terms of the number of frames and octets they have transmitted during a specified reporting period. This report allows MIS managers to determine who is generating the most traffic on a WAN based on IP addresses.

Figure 3.49 Top Talkers Screen

To generate a Top Talkers report, enter the desired report size in the appropriate field and then click the “Submit” button.

Duration Establishes the amount of time (in seconds) for which the Top Talkers report will capture IP traffic; typically this value is 900 seconds (15 minutes).

Time Remaining Establishes the amount of time (in seconds) for which the Top Talkers report will capture IP traffic; typically this value is 900 (15 minutes). As soon as you initiate generation of the report by pressing the “Submit” button, the Time Remaining value is copied over to the Duration field.

Requested Report Size Establishes how many IP addresses will be reported as the “Top Talkers.”

NOTICE: While you may request any number, the unit is internally limited to a maximum report size of 20.

3-60 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 93: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

As soon as the specified Duration for the report has elapsed, the screen will refresh itself and the resulting report-specific information will be displayed in the outlined box at the bottom of the screen. This report comprises elements as defined in the following paragraphs.

Report # Displays a unique number used to identify the generated report. This number is generated automatically, is incremented sequentially for each report, and can be used by management stations for automatic polling (via the ipadv2.mib).

Size Displays the actual number of Top Talkers generated by the report. The maximum report size is 20.

Start Time Displays the time at which the Top Talkers report was initiated (based on System Up Time).

System Up Time Displays the amount of time the unit has been operational since it was turned on or last reset.

The Top Talkers table reports in descending order the IP addresses that have generated the most traffic during the requested report’s duration. For each IP address listed, the report displays the number of Rx frames, Rx octets, Tx frames, and Tx octets that have been passed across it. In addition, the Timestamp field indicates the time at which a packet was examined for the specified IP address.

IP Gateway Details ScreenThe IP Gateway is a feature of the WANsuite 5160/5130 that allows routing of IP packets from one network to another using static routes configuration and/or dynamic routing. The IP Gateway uses Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 1 or RIP 2 or Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing.

RIP 1 and RIP 2 are protocols that allow exchange of routing information between two routers. With that information exchange, a router can build its own routing tables that later can be used for “routing” IP packets.

OSPF is a shortest path first (SPF) or link-state protocol. OSPF is also an internal gateway protocol (IGP) that distributes routing information between routers in a single autonomous system (AS). OSPF chooses the least cost path as the best path.

While RIP is ideal for small- to medium-sized networks, OSPF is more suitable for complex networks with a large number of routers. OSPF provides equal cost multipath routing where packets to a single destination can be sent via more than one interface simultaneously.

The IP Gateway also supports unnumbered networks. An unnumbered network is a point-to-point connection without an assigned IP address This feature reduces the number of IP addresses required.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-61

Page 94: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.50 IP Gateway Details Screen

RIP Parameters

RIP Enable Globally enables RIP 1, RIP 2, or No RIP.Values: Disable, Enable RIP1, Enable RIP2Default: Enable RIP2

RIP Trust Neighbors Globally enables the trusted neighbors feature. If there is a list of trusted neighbors in an IP Gateway, only RIP packets coming from those trusted neighbors will be used to build the internal routing table.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

RIP Interval Interval for RIP packet to be sent. Default is 30 seconds.

RIP Domain Value representing the RIP domain. Default is 0.

OSPF Parameters

OSPF Enable Globally enables OSPF.Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

OSPF Router ID This 32-bit number assigned to each router running the OSPF protocol uniquely identifies the router within an Autonomous System. Each router requires a unique router ID. Default is the LAN IP address of the unit.

3-62 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 95: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The IP Gateway screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Circuit Table Screen

Access this menu by clicking on the “Circuit Table” button at the bottom of the IP Gateway Details screen. The Circuit Table shows the configured circuit. To configure a new circuit, click on "Add New."

Figure 3.51 Circuit Table Screen

Circuit Details ScreenAccess this menu by accessing the appropriate numbered link under the “Index” column on the Circuit Table screen.

Button Function

RIP Parameters

Static Route Table Displays static routes and dynamic routes information.

Static ARP Table Displays static ARP information.

Trusted Neighbors Displays trusted neighbors information.

OSPF Parameters

Area Table Displays area information.

Virtual Link Table Displays virtual link information.

Submit Submits to the unit information specific to IP Gateway.

Circuit Table Lets you access to circuit-related information/operation.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-63

Page 96: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.52 Circuit Details Screen

Endpoint Endpoint name. By default, the first circuit is always the LAN circuit. All other circuits are associated with Endpoint names as defined in the Endpoint Table shown in Figure 3.36 on page 3-42.

IP Address IP Address of the circuit.

IP Mask IP mask of the circuit.

Max Transmit Unit Maximum transmit unit this circuit will send at any one time.

Cost Represents the relative time of treatment of an IP packet. This value is used when there are multiple routes to the same destination. When two or more routes are available, the one with the lowest circuit cost is selected. A frame relay circuit should have a higher value than a LAN circuit.

RIP Status Indicates whether or not RIP is enabled on this circuit.Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

Multicast Status Indicates whether or not Multicast is enabled on this circuit.Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

OSPF Status Indicates whether or not OSPF is enabled on this circuit.Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Disable

3-64 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 97: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

OSPF Area Represents the area that this circuit is part of.

OSPF LSA Timer Determines how often the Link State Acknowledgment (LSA) packet is sent.Values: 1−3600Default: 1

OSPF LSU Delay The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State Update (LSU) packet over this circuit interface.

Values: 1−3600Default: 1

OSPF Router Priority This 8-bit unsigned integer ranges from 1 to 255 and assigns priority to one of two routers attached to the same network; without an assigned priority, both routers attempt to become the designated router.

Values: 1−255Default: 1

OSPF Hello Interval The time in seconds between the Hello packets that a router sends on a circuit. This value is also advertised in the router’s Hello packets and must be identical for all routers on the same network. The smaller the Hello Interval, the sooner topological changes are detected (but then more traffic is created).

Values: 1−65535Default: 1

OSPF Dead Interval The number of seconds during which a router’s “Hellos” have not been received before its neighbors declare the router down. The value must be the same as the value on the network.

Values: 1−65535Default: 40

OSPF Auth Key When configured, this parameter allows an authentication procedure to be executed on the OSPF header. If the 64-bit (8 character) password does not correspond, the packet is thrown away.

Values: 64 bits (8 characters)Default: 8 spaces (no authentication)

The Circuit Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Static Routes Screen

Under some circumstances, it may not be necessary for a router to learn a route using ordinary means such as RIP or OSPF. It is possible under these circumstances for you to add a route to the route table of a router.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Circuit Table Returns you to the previous screen.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-65

Page 98: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The Static Route Table is always associated with a circuit. Access this screen by selecting the Static Route Table from the RIP Parameters Table on the IP Gateway Details screen.

Figure 3.53 Static Route Table Screen

Endpoint Endpoint name (or interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the Target IP Address.

Target IP Address Represents the target network that you want this router to reach.

Target IP Mask Mask of the target network.

Next Hop IP address of the next device in the route.

Cost Cost of using that route.

Route Status Indicates whether a route is enabled or disabled.

The Static Routes Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Route Details ScreenAccess this menu by clicking on the appropriate number under the “Index” column on the Static Route Table screen.

Button Function

Dynamic Route Table Displays all known routes.

Add New Adds a new static route.

3-66 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 99: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.54 Route Details Screen

Endpoint Endpoint name (or interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the Target IP Address.

Target IP Address Represents the target network that you want this router to reach.Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

Target IP Mask Mask of the Target IP or network.Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

NOTICE: Setting the Target IP Address and the Target IP Mask to 0.0.0.0 defines THE default route for this unit.

Next Hop IP Address IP address of the next device in the route.

Cost Cost of using that route.Values: 0−65535Default: 1

Route Status Indicates whether or not the current route is enabled.Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

The Route Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Static Route Table Returns you to the previous screen.

Delete Route Deletes the route currently displayed.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-67

Page 100: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Dynamic Route Table Screen

Access this menu by selecting “Static Route Table” from the RIP Parameters table on the IP Gateway menu and then selecting Dynamic Route Table. This table shows all known dynamic and static routes. Please note that not all parameters are necessarily defined, depending on whether or not the routes were learned dynamically. Primarily, the most useful information is included in "Destination," "Interface Index," and "Mask" columns.

Figure 3.55 Dynamic Route Table Screen

Destination Network to be reached.

Interface Index Internal TCP/IP stack interface number.

Next Hop IP address used to reach the destination network.

Mask Mask of the destination network.

Static ARP Table Screen

Address Resolution Protocol, or ARP, is used by the router to dynamically associate a high-level IP address with a low-level physical hardware address. ARP packets are only sent across a single physical network.

There are some cases when an IP-compatible device does not support ARP or ARP is deliberately disabled (for security). In these cases, instead of using ARP to dynamically update the router internal MAC <-> IP Address Table, you can use this menu to force an entry into that table. This entry never times out.

NOTICE: At least one circuit must be defined to create a Static ARP Table entry because an ARP entry is always associated with a circuit.

Access this menu by selecting “Static ARP Table” from the RIP Parameters screen on the IP Gateway menu. The ARP Table is useful when a Host does not respond to an ARP request.

3-68 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 101: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.56 ARP Table Screen

Endpoint Endpoint name (or Interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the defined IP Address. The default is the LAN.

IP Address The IP address of the unit for which you want to define the MAC address.

MAC Address The MAC address of the host to be reached.

ARP Status Displays whether this static ARP is enabled or disabled.

The Static ARP Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

ARP Details ScreenAccess this screen by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the “Index” column on the ARP Table screen.

Figure 3.57 ARP Details Screen

Endpoint Endpoint name (or Interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the defined IP Address. Currently, this is always the LAN.

IP Address IP address of the circuit.Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

Button Function

Dynamic ARP Table Displays the dynamically learned MAC <-> IP address.

Add New Adds a new static ARP.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-69

Page 102: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

MAC Address MAC address of the Host to be reached.Values: A 6-byte valueDefault: 00-00-00-00-00-00

ARP Status Displays whether this ARP is enabled or disabled.Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

The ARP Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Trusted Neighbor Table Screen

The Trusted Neighbors feature can be used to store RIP information only from specific routers. This allows the router to reject any RIP information coming from non-Trusted Neighbors. Only information coming from Trusted Neighbors is kept by the router.

Access this menu by selecting Trusted Neighbors from the RIP Parameters on the IP Gateway menu. This table is useful when the Network Administrator wants to listen to RIP of specific router(s).

Figure 3.58 Trusted Neighbor Table Screen

Neighbor Details ScreenAccess this screen (Figure 3.59) by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the “Index” column on the Trusted Neighbor Table screen. This screen lists all IP addresses of Trusted Neighbors.

Figure 3.59 Neighbor Details Screen

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Static ARP Table Returns you to the previous screen.

Delete ARP Deletes this static ARP.

3-70 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 103: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The Neighbor Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Area Table Screen

An Area allows growth and makes the networks at a site easier to manage. An area is self-contained; knowledge of an area’s topology remains hidden from other areas. Thus, multiple groups within a given site retain the ability to change their internal network topology independently.

Access the Area Table Screen from the OSPF Parameters table on the IP Gateway screen.

Figure 3.60 Area Table Screen

ID Displays the ID of the Area (represented by an IP address).

Enable Displays whether the defined Area is enabled or disabled.

Auth Type Indicates Area validation.

Stub Displays whether or not the defined area is a Stub Area.

Address Summary Displays the Address Summary of the defined Area.

Mask Summary Displays the Mask Summary of the defined Area.

Advertise Displays whether advertising is enabled or disabled for this Area.

The “Add New” button on the Area Table screen lets you define a new Area.

Area Details ScreenAccess this screen by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the “Index” column on the Area Table screen.

Button Function

Trusted Neighborse Returns you to the previous screen.

Delete Neighbors Deletes this Trusted Neighbor.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-71

Page 104: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.61 Area Details Screen

Area ID This parameter has the same format as the IP Address of the Mask Address.Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

Enable Displays whether or not this Area is enabled.Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

Auth Type Indicates type of Authentication.Values: Simple, NoneDefault: None

Stub An area can be configured as stub when there is a single exit point from the area, or when the choice of exit point need not be made on a per-external-destination basis.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

Address Summary A configured address range specifies what addresses are contained within an area. When summarizing the routes in an area to inform other areas, all routes falling within the configured range are described by a single LSA, thus decreasing the size of the LSA database.

Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

Mask Summary IP Mask of the summary to be added.Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

Advertise Describes the local state of a router or network. This includes the state of the route’s interfaces and adjacencies. Each link state advertisement is flooded throughout the routing domain. The collected link state advertisements of all routers and networks form the protocol's topological database.

3-72 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 105: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

The Area Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Virtual Link Table Screen

To permit maximum flexibility, OSPF allows the configuration of virtual links to enable the backbone area to appear contiguous despite the physical reality.

In OSPF, the backbone is defined as an Area ID of 0.0.0.0. This backbone cannot be disconnected in any way or some areas of the Autonomous System become unreachable. This is because all inter-area traffic must go through the backbone. In fact, the backbone is responsible for all inter-area routing information distribution.

It is possible that an area cannot be connected directly to the backbone; in this case a virtual link is used (Figure 3.62). To establish or maintain the connectivity of the backbone, virtual links can be configured through non-backbone areas. Basically, virtual links are used to connect components that are otherwise not connected to the backbone.

A virtual link is treated by OSPF as a point-to-point unnumbered network joining two area border routers. The virtual link must be configured in both of the area border routers.

A virtual link is defined by the following two parameters:

• The Router ID of the virtual link’s other endpoint.

• The non-backbone that the virtual link crosses through.

Access this screen by selecting the Virtual Link Table from the OSPF Parameters table on the IP Gateway screen.

Figure 3.62 Virtual Link Table Screen

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Area Table Returns you to the previous screen.

Delete Area Deletes the currently defined Area.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-73

Page 106: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Enable Enables this definition of a virtual link.

Transit Area ID The non-backbone area that the virtual link goes through.

Area Border Router ID The Router ID of the virtual link’s other endpoint.

The “Add New” button lets you define a new Virtual Link.

Virtual Link Details ScreenAccess this screen (Figure 3.63) by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the “Index” column on the Virtual Link Table screen.

Figure 3.63 Virtual Link Details Screen

The Virtual Link Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

TCP Server

NOTICE: TCP Server traffic has a higher priority than other types of traffic flowing through the unit. Refer to Normal Tx Queue Size on page 3-29 for more details.

The TCP Server is a general-purpose application that maps arbitrary TCP port numbers to non-TCP/IP devices that have been assigned an endpoint. (See the Endpoint Table Screen on page 3-42.)

TCP Server Details Screen

The TCP Server Details screen (Figure 3.64) lets you establish TCP connections and map them to physical devices that communicate via a supported interface.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Virtual Link Table Returns you to the previous screen.

Delete Virtual Link Deletes currently defined Virtual Link.

3-74 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 107: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.64 TCP Server Details Screen

Access the TCP Connection Details screen (Figure 3.65) by clicking on the appropriate number under the “Connection” column on the above screen. The TCP Connection Details screen lists the index number, the endpoint name, the TCP local port number, and whether or not this entry is enabled.

Figure 3.65 TCP Connection Details Screen

Select the TCP Connection Table to access the screen shown in Figure 3.66. This screen lets you see which addresses and ports are in a “listening” state and which are already established.

Figure 3.66 TCP Connection Table Screen

Click on the “TCP Host Access Table” button on the TCP Connection Details screen to access a screen (Figure 3.67) where you can specify up to 10 IP addresses that may access the services provided by TCP Server. If no addresses are provided, any host can access the services provided by TCP Server.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-75

Page 108: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.67 TCP Host Access Table Screen

You can access the Host Access Details (Figure 3.68) for a specific Index number by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the “Index” column.

Figure 3.68 TCP Host Access Details

Network Address Translation (NAT)NAT is a method of connecting multiple computers to the Internet (or any other IP network) using one IP address. This lets users cost-effectively and efficiently connect their networks to the Internet.

Whether on a global or local port, NAT provides translation only upon receipt of a packet, which NAT will translate, not translate, or filter, depending on the user-specified parameters (further described below). If the decision is made to “translate,” the packet will be modified internally, and eventually sent on to the IP Gateway to be processed. If the decision is made not to “translate,” the packet will not be modified in any way. If the decision is made to “filter,” the packet will be discarded without any further action required.

NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for any changes in NAT configuration parameters to take effect.

3-76 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 109: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

NAT Details Screen

The NAT Details screen (Figure 3.69) lets the user configure the NAT global parameters described below.

Figure 3.69 NAT Details Screen

Enable Enables or disables NAT. Default is “Disable.”

Mode Selects the Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) mode or the Basic NAT mode. In NAPT mode, all hosts on the Global (public) side view all hosts on the Local (private) side as a single internet host (one IP address). In Basic NAT mode, the Global IP address is assigned as a Class C host address (Mask of 255.255.255.0). Each private IP address on the Local side is mapped to a Class C public address on the Global side. In other words, if there are 30 hosts on the private (Local) side, 30 public (Global) addresses are required. The default is NAPT.

Global IP Addr Global IP Address used in NAPT mode. Must be a valid Class C address. Default is LAN IP Address.

Global Mask IP Mask associated with defined Global IP Address. Default is LAN IP Mask.

ICMP Default Addr Default source address used to answer any ICMP request. Default is LAN IP Address. ICMP requests are not transferred from the Global to the Local side. Rather they are answered by the unit itself since Local addresses are private and do not receive unsolicited requests.

Filter Non LocalAddress

Discards any packet with “non corporate” source address. Default is “Enable.”

The screen parameters listed below are related to the NAT Control Block Timer. Note that default values should be in accordance with most NAT applications. The timers’ values minimize NAT resources. Generally, when a timer has expired, the resources used are no longer needed. Those resources will then be available for other connection resources.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-77

Page 110: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

IP Entry Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when not using TCP, UDP, or ICMP.

Values: 0−65535Default: 120

TCP Connection Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to establish a TCP connection.

Values: 0−65535Default: 300

TCP Closing Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to close a TCP connection.

Values: 0−65535Default: 0

TCP DisconnectedTimer

The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to disconnect from TCP.

Values: 0−65535Default: 120

TCP Sequence DeltaTimer

The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when managing TCP Packet Sequencing.

Values: 0−65535Default: 180

UDP Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources for a UDP port in use.

Values: 0−65535Default: 120

ICMP Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources for any ICMP request.

Values: 0−65535Default: 120

The NAT Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Static TCP Translation Table Allows static mapping of global TCP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination.

Static UDP Translation Table Allows static mapping of global UDP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination.

NAT Port Table Defines NAT global/Internet and local/corporate ports.

3-78 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 111: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Static TCP Translation Table Screen

The Static TCP Translation Table screen (Figure 3.70) allows static mapping of global TCP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination. The parameters described below enable access to TCP servers on the private/corporate network “behind the NAT.” The parameters may be used only when in NAPT mode.

Figure 3.70 Static TCP Translation Table Screen

Global Port Decimal IP Port exposed to the global Internet. Default is 0.

Server Port Decimal IP Port of the local TCP Server. This port is usually the same as the Global Port. Default is 0.

Server Address IP Address of the local TCP Server. Default is 0.0.0.0.

The Static TCP Translation Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

You can configure or change the above-listed parameters on the NAT Static TCP Translation Details screen (Figure 3.71), which is accessed by selecting the appropriate number under the “Index” column on the Static TCP Translation Table screen.

Figure 3.71 NAT Static TCP Translation Details Screen

Static UDP Translation Table Screen

The Static UDP Translation Table screen (Figure 3.73) allows static mapping of global UDP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination. The parameters described below enable access to UDP Servers on the private/

Button Function

NAT Details Returns the user to the previous screen.

Add New Lets the user add additional addresses.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-79

Page 112: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

corporate network “behind the NAT.” The parameters may be used only when in NAPT mode.

Figure 3.72 Static UDP Translation Table Screen

Global Port Decimal IP Port exposed to the global Internet. Default is 0.

Server Port Decimal IP Port of the local UDP Server. This port is usually the same as the Global Port. Default is 0.

Server Address IP Address of the local UDP Server. Default is 0.0.0.0.

The Static UDP Translation Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

You can configure or change the above-listed parameters on the NAT Static UDP Translation Details screen (Figure 3.73), which is accessed by selecting the appropriate numbered link under the “Index” column on the Static UDP Translation Table screen.

Figure 3.73 NAT Static UDP Translation Details Screen

NAT Port Table Screen

The parameters on the NAT Port Table screen (Figure 3.74) define the NAT global/Internet and local/Corporate ports. These parameters are configured in the NAT Ports Details screen shown in Figure 3.75. Access the NAT Ports Details screen by clicking on the Index number of the desired port on the NAT Port Table screen.

Button Function

NAT Details Returns the user to the previous screen.

Add New Lets the user add an additional address.

3-80 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 113: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.74 NAT Port Table Screen

Endpoint The Endpoint name of the circuit associated with the LAN or WAN port. Default is LAN for the first port.

Enable Enables or disables the NAT port. Default is “Enable.”

Default Translation Forces translation on a specific IP port regardless of the source IP Address. If Default Translation is set to “Enable,” the packet will never be discarded, but will always pass through the translation path. Therefore, any packets with a destination address different from the global/Internet network address will be processed by the IP Gateway, and may be routed to another port. If this parameter is set to “Disable,” no packet with a destination address different from the global/Internet address will be processed. Setting this parameter to “Disable” will override an “Enable” parameter set under “Filter Non Local Address” on the NAT Details menu.

Type Defines whether this port is local or global. Default is LAN global. All others are local.

IP Address IP Address of this port. Default is the value defined in the IP Gateway Circuit Table.

Mask Mask related to the defined IP Address. Default is the value defined in the IP Gateway Circuit Table.

The NAT Port Table screen provides an “Add New” button that lets you add additional addresses.

Figure 3.75 NAT Port Details Screen

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-81

Page 114: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The NAT Port Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

The NAT Port Status Table (Figure 3.76) displays for each port the processed packets from specific IP addresses.

Figure 3.76 NAT Port Status Table Screen

IP Address Original IP Address of the host.

NAT IP Address Translated IP Address of the host.

Processed Packets Number of packets processed by NAT for this address.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)DHCP provides a mechanism through which computers using TCP/IP can obtain protocol configuration parameters automatically through the network.

The most important configuration parameter associated with DHCP is the IP address. A computer must initially be assigned a specific IP address that is appropriate to the network to which the computer is attached, and that is not assigned to any other computer on that network. If a computer moves to a new network, it must be assigned a new IP address for that new network. DHCP can be used to manage these assignments automatically.

DHCP has other important configuration parameters also, such as the subnet mask, default router, and Domain Name System (DNS) server. Using DHCP, a network administrator can avoid “hands-on” configuration of individual computers through complex and confusing setup applications. Instead, those computers can obtain all required configuration parameters automatically, without manual intervention, from a centrally managed DHCP server. DHCP is available on the 10/100 Ethernet port only.

NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for any changes in DHCP configuration parameters to take effect.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

NAT Details Returns the user to the NAT Details screen.

NAT Port Table Returns the user to the NAT Port Table screen.

Delete NAT Port Deletes the specified NAT Port.

NAT Port Status Displays the NAT Port Status Table screen.

3-82 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 115: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a 60-second timeout will occur.

DHCP Server Details Screen

The DHCP Server Details screen (Figure 3.77) lets you configure the parameters described below.

Figure 3.77 DHCP Server Details Screen

Enable Enables or disables the DHCP Server. Default is “Disable.”

Number of Ports Defines the number of DHCP ports to be used. In this version, only “1” is a valid value.

TTL Time to Live for any DHCP packet. Default is 64.

Service Type Type of Service used by the DHCP Server packet. Default is 1.

Lease Time Tells the DHCP client the number of seconds it can retain this IP address. The client should make a new DHCP request within the specified amount of time to ensure the IP address is not given to another PC. Default is 600 seconds.

Primary DNS IP Addr If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this address to resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.

Secondary DNS IPAddr

If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this secondary address to resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.

Domain Name Domain name to be used by all DHCP clients. Default is user’s server.

Router IP Addr IP address that all clients use for Gateway or Router. Default is 0.0.0.0.

Primary WINS IPAddr

If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this address to resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-83

Page 116: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Secondary WINS IPAddr

If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this secondary address to resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.

The DHCP Server Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

DHCP Host Table Screen

In some cases, it may be necessary to provide an IP station with a specific DHCP server name, which may be used by the IP station when making a DHCP request. That name is included on the DHCP Host Table screen (Figure 3.78), which identifies the DHCP server sending DHCP packets. This parameter is configured on the DHCP Host Details screen (Figure 3.79) accessed by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the “Index” column.

Figure 3.78 DHCP Host Table Screen

Host Name The name of the DHCP Server. Default is none.

The DHCP Host Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for the new Server name to become active.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Host Table Lists Host names (DHCP server identification).

Static Entry Table Creates a list of static IP addresses associated with MAC addresses.

IP Address List Table Defines the addresses available for DHCP clients.

IP Address Status Table Displays DHCP Server statistics.

Button Function

DHCP Details Returns the user to the previous screen.

Add New Adds a new Server name.

3-84 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 117: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.79 DHCP Host Details Screen

Static Entry Table Screen

The Static Entry Table screen (Figure 3.80) lists static IP addresses associated with MAC addresses. This ensures that the same IP address will always be used for a given PC provided its MAC address is known. These parameters are configured on the Static Entry Details screen (Figure 3.81) accessed by selecting a number from the “Entry Index” column.

Figure 3.80 Static Entry Table Screen

MAC Address MAC Address you want to associate with an IP address.

IP Address IP Address given to the DHCP client if that client has the MAC Address defined on this screen.

Mask Mask associated with the IP Address shown on the screen.

Host Name Name given to the DHCP client.

The Static Entry Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Button Function

DHCP Details Returns the user to the previous screen.

Add New Lets the user add an additional Static Entry.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-85

Page 118: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.81 Static Entry Details Screen

IP Address List Table Screen

The IP Address List Table screen (Figure 3.4) displays the “pool” of addresses available for DHCP clients. These parameters are configured on the IP Address Details screen (Figure 3.83) accessed by clicking on an “Index” number.

Figure 3.82 IP Address List Table Screen

Start Starting IP Address of the DHCP client pool.

End Ending IP Address of the DHCP client pool.

Subnet Mask Subnet Mask associated with the defined range.

Exclude Start Beginning of “excluded” range.

Exclude End End of “excluded” range.

The IP Address List Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Button Function

DHCP Details Returns the user to the previous screen.

Add New Lets the user add an additional IP address.

3-86 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 119: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.83 IP Address Details

IP Address Status Table Screen

The IP Address Status Table screen (Figure 3.84) displays a list of all current DHCP clients.

Figure 3.84 IP Address Status Table Screen

MAC Address MAC Address of this DHCP client.

IP Address IP Address given to this DHCP client if that client has the MAC Address defined on this screen.

Status Provides IP Address Status.

BridgeA Bridge operates at the physical network layer, connecting two or more networks and forwarding packets between those networks. For example, a Bridge will connect two or more physical Ethernet cable segments and forward Ethernet packets from one segment to the other.

Bridges differ from routers in that bridges forward packets based on physical addresses rather than on the IP Addresses that routers use to forward packets. Bridges will not “blindly” forward packets from one network to others, however. Rather, it learns all local physical addresses and forwards packets based on those learned “tables.” This greatly reduces the number of broadcasted packets, thus saving valuable bandwidth.

The Bridge Details screen shown in Figure 3.85 lets you access and configure the parameters described below.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-87

Page 120: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.85 Bridge Details Screen

From this screen, you may view the parameters described below.

Enable Enables or disables Bridging capability.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Disable

Group Multicast MACAddress

MAC Address recognized by the Bridge as the group address for the Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) transfer between bridges.

Values: Any valid Group Multicast MAC AddressDefault: 0180C2000000

Bridge ID Consists of a bridge priority and its own MAC Address.

Values: 1−65535Default: 2

Hello Timer Specifies the BPDU broadcasting interval.

Values: 1−65535 sDefault: 10 s

Max Age Timer Specifies the length of time a bridge will consider the network topology held in memory as valid.

Values: 1−65535 sDefault: 60 s

Forward Delay Specifies the length of time to delay creation of a temporary loop in the network.

Values: 1−65535 sDefault: 5 s

Filter Ageing Timer Specifies the length of time an entry in the lookup table will be held if no traffic is received from the specified MAC Address.

Values: 1−65535 sDefault: 300 s

3-88 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 121: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The Bridge Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:

Figure 3.86 Bridge Port Table

The Bridge Port Table screen lets you view the parameters described below the Bridge Port Details screen. Clicking on a number in the “Index” column of the Bridge Port Table will bring up the Bridge Port Details screen, which displays, and, in some cases, lets you change, the parameters described below.

Figure 3.87 Bridge Port Details

Enable Enables or disables Bridging on this port.

Endpoint Endpoint name.

BPDU Option Shows if BPDU packet will be sent and received on this port.

Filter By MulticastAddr Dest

Filters multicast messages received on this port, which reduces the load on the WAN connection.

Button Function

Submit Sets any values that have been changed.

Bridge Port Table Displays the Bridge Port Table screen (Figure 3.86) that lets the user access and configure the Bridge Port Details screen (Figure 3.87).

Bridge Lookup Table Displays the Bridge Lookup Table screen (Figure 3.88) that contains all MAC Addresses learned by the Bridge.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-89

Page 122: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Filter By BroadcastAddr Dest

Filters broadcast messages received on this port, which reduces the load on the WAN connection.

Forward IP FramesOnly

Setting this option to “Yes” specifies that only IP frames will be forwarded and all other frames will be filtered.

Priority Value of priority associated with this port. The lower the value, the higher the priority.

Path Cost Value of efficiency of the path to the port. A higher path cost indicates a slower link.

State If Enabled, reflects the state of the port. “Blocking” means there is no data transfer between LANs. “Listening” means the frames received from this port are filtered, but do not modify the Lookup Table. “Learning” means that while the port continues to look at frames without participating in data transfer, the frames received from the port will be used to update the Lookup Table. “Forwarding” means the port participates fully in data transfer and the frames received are used to update the Lookup Table.

Designated Root MAC Address of the designated root of the spanning-tree topology.

Designated Cost Associated Path Cost to the route for this port.

Designated Bridge Designated Bridge MAC Address.

ForwardTransmissions

Number of times this port has changed from any other state to a “Forwarding” state.

Input Frame Number of frames received.

Output Frame Number of frames transmitted.

Input Discards Number of frames discarded.

Figure 3.88 Bridge Lookup Table

Address MAC Address learned and included in the forwarding table.

Port Port where the MAC Address was learned.

Status How the address was included in the forwarding table. The two possibilities include “Self” (the unit’s own MAC address), and “Learned” (the unit-learned MAC address is directly accessible by this port).

3-90 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 123: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)Use the SMTP Details Screen (Figure 3.89) to configure the SMTP function of the WANsuite 5160/5130. SMTP is used to forward notification of events to a user-definable list of up to five recipients. The even notification is sent as an e-mail in the following format:

From: [email protected]: Event ReceiverSubject: Even Notification

IP Address: 192.168.60.157System Up Time: 0 days, 01:20:02System Name:System Location:System Contact:

Reporting the following event:OOFS Threshold Exceeded, ifIndex 3, Count 5

The parameters associated with the SMTP Details screen are described below.

Figure 3.89 SMTP Details Screen

Mail Server IP Address IP address of the mail server to which notifications will be sent.

Domain Name Name of domain where the device resides (i.e., Verilink.com)

Mail From E-mail address of the device (WANsuite). While the device will not be able to retrieve e-mail from a service, the mail needs to have the “From” address filled in.

Recipient 1...5 E-mail addresses of recipients of event notifications (i.e., [email protected] or [email protected]).

EncryptionIf a DLCI encapsulation is set for FRF.17 instead of RFC1490, all data will be encrypted using FRF.17 Mode One formats and protocols. However, the encryption method is Blowfish, rather than the DES specified in FRF.17.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-91

Page 124: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

NOTICE: This software-based encryption should not affect performance of the unit in a SCADA environment because the message size is quite small. However, a main site unit encrypting up to 128 DLCIs and operating a number of remote units using encryption will see a degradation in performance as traffic increases.

Figure 3.90 Encryption Details Screen

UtilitiesThe options available beneath the Utilities branch of the navigation tree serve as utilities for upgrading the software in your WANsuite 5160/5130, managing access with passwords, and logging off the system.

NOTICE: Make sure you allow sufficient time for the download to occur. Cancelling the download before it has fully executed will result in the new software NOT being installed into the unit.

Upload/SaveThe Upload/Save screen (Figure 3.91) lets you save a new configuration, upload a former configuration, or install software.

NOTICE: Make sure you allow sufficient time for the installation to occur. Cancelling the installation before it has fully executed will result in the new software NOT being installed into the unit.

3-92 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 125: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 3.91 Upload/Save Screen

PasswordThe Password screen (Figure 3.92) is used to modify the password that restricts access to the Web Server interface.

Acceptable characters for use in a password are digits 0–9 and letters A–Z and a–z, for a total of 62 distinct characters.

Figure 3.92 Password Screen

To change either the Admin or Read-Only password, you must enter it once in the New Password field and then re-enter the same password in the Confirm Password field. After entering the new password in both these fields, click the “Change Admin Password” or the “Change Read Only Password” button to update and establish the new password.

NOTICE: Remember that passwords are case-sensitive and are limited to no more than 10 characters. When logging on, password must be entered exactly as it was programmed.

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-93

Page 126: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Log OutThe Log Out screen (Figure 3.93) is used to log the current user off of the Web Server. The Log Out function is only available after user password protection has been set. You will be logged out of the system automatically 1 hour after you user log on using a password to gain access; after this, you will be required to enter the password to gain write access.

Figure 3.93 Log Out Screen

In-band ManagementThere are two ways to implement remote in-band management of a WANsuite 5160/5130 unit. The first is to use the local router to route management frames (Web browser or SNMP) between the local LAN and the remote unit. The second is to use the local WANsuite 5160/5130 unit as an independent gateway.

Use of Connected Local Router

If this method is used, there is no configuration required in the WANsuite 5160/5130s. Local Router A will route Web/SNMP frames from the PC to the remote WANsuite 5160/5130s. The remote WANsuite 5160/5130 IP address must be set within the same network as the remote routers B and C LAN network.

Figure 3.94 Frame Relay Network

If the remote units are required to have an IP address for Networks that are different from the remote routers, a static route will have to be configured in the local router (Router A) for each remote WANsuite 5160/5130 to manage. If Router A becomes unavailable, there is no way to reach the remote WANsuite 5160/5130s.

PC

RouterA

FSM

FSM

FSMRouter

C

RouterB

WANSUITE5160/5130

WANSUITE5160/5130

WANSUITE5160/5130

3-94 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 127: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Use of Local WANsuite 5160/5130 as a Gateway

If you choose this method, the WANsuite 5160/5130s are totally independent from the routers, so all units will be accessible as long as the frame relay network stays up. The IP address assignment is also independent from the routers. The PC used for management must have the local WANsuite 5160/5130’s IP address as its gateway address so that it can reach all remote WANsuite 5160/5130s.

Figure 3.95 Frame Relay Network

In the local WANsuite 5160/5130, the IP address and mask of each remote WANsuite 5160/5130 will have to be configured in the Endpoint table. The “In-Band Management” parameter will also have to be set in the corresponding DLCI. Each remote WANsuite 5160/5130 must be part of a different IP network address.

PC

RouterA

FSM

FSM

FSMRouter

C

RouterB

WANSUITE5160/5130

WANSUITE5160/5130

WANSUITE5160/5130

W e b S e r v e r I n t e r f a c e 3-95

Page 128: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

3-96 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 129: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

C H A P T E R

4CHAPTER 4VT100 INTERFACE

IntroductionThis chapter describes the menus and options associated with the WANsuite 5160/5130’s VT100 interface. The screens displayed throughout this chapter were accessed through a TELNET session and are, for the most part, WANsuite 5160 screens. However, where there are significant differences between the 5160 and 5130 screens, both are displayed.

NOTICE: The material presented in this chapter follows the order in which the screens are presented in the VT100 interface. However, because the parameters you specify in the Service Table attach protocols to interfaces, you must configure the Service Table first. (See Service Table Screen on page 4-20.) You will not be able to allocate channels (see Channel Table Details Screen on page 4-25) until the Service Table has been configured.

Accessing the VT100 InterfaceYou can access the VT100 interface locally via the Supervisory port or remotely through a TELNET session. To access the VT100 screens locally, verify the Supervisory type is “tty” and the Supervisory port speed matches the terminal emulation program that’s being used. (Port speeds supported include the following: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps.) You can access the VT100 interface remotely by opening a TELNET session, entering the unit’s IP address, and connecting to the unit.

Screen ComponentsThe VT100 terminal screens have several components common to all screens (see Figure 4.1 below). These components include the device type (in the example below, Verilink WANsuite 5160), which is centered on the screen, the software and hardware revision numbers (upper left), the date and time (upper right), the menu title (“Main” in the figure below), and the serial number under which the unit is operating. Except for the Main screen shown

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-1

Page 130: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

in Figure 4.2, the screen captures throughout this chapter show only the configuration portion of the screen and not the screen components.

Figure 4.1 VT100 Terminal Screen Components

Cursor ControlsThe VT100 interface uses a blinking cursor to select various menus and then to select sub-menus and/or fields within those menus. You can navigate using this cursor in different ways, depending on the program you use. Most programs allow use of the “Tab” key and the “Shift+Tab” keys. Others allow use of the arrow keys.

NOTICE: If you are not able to use your arrow keys, access the pull-down menu under “Terminal,” click on “Preferences,” and be sure the “VT100 Arrows” box is checked.

For keyboards that don’t have these standard keys or have only some of them, an alternative set of cursor control commands is provided. Perform each command by pressing a letter key while holding down the “Ctrl” key. You may use the alternative commands (listed in the table below) and keyboard commands interchangeably at your discretion.

You can navigate further within a menu as described below.

Field TypesEach menu screen is composed of fields. The two basic field types are user-selectable (most of these are in brackets or parentheses) and display-only (no brackets or parentheses). If you can move the highlighted cursor to a field, that field is user-selectable; all other fields are display-only. User-selectable fields are those in which you can make changes or execute commands. To save changed parameters, in most cases you will “Esc” out of the current

Keyboard Command Alternative Command

Left Arrow Ctrl+S

Right Arrow Ctrl+D

Up Arrow Ctrl+E

Down Arrow Ctrl+X

Backspace Ctrl+H

Delete Ctrl+Z

4-2 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 131: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

menu after changing the parameters. In some cases, you will press the “Enter” key to save new parameters.

Fields enclosed in brackets [ ] offer a list of selections from which to choose. The selections may be made by pressing your Spacebar to “toggle” between choices. Each time the Spacebar is pressed, a new item appears. When the item you wish to choose is displayed, press the “Esc” key to save it.

Fields enclosed in parentheses ( ) are manipulated by one of the following two methods. The first is to press the “Enter” key to simply execute the function. The most common type of field in parentheses accepts typed input in the form of letters and/or numbers. Typing characters when the field is highlighted causes the current entry to be replaced by the new characters. To edit an existing entry rather than replace it, press the right arrow key to move the cursor to the point that needs editing. You may insert characters or delete them. Typed data must always be inserted rather than typed over. If the field is full, you must first delete at least one character before you can add another.

The lower right corner of each screen displays whether or not a “Save and Restart” is necessary when parameters are changed on the currently displayed screen.

NOTICE: The VT100 screens are automatically refreshed every 4 seconds. However, you may also press Ctrl+U to refresh data on any screen.

Menu StructureThe Main Menu screen (shown in Figure 4.2) lists the functional user-accessible menus. To activate a specific menu, tab to it (or use your arrow keys) and press “Enter.” To exit this or any subsequent menu, press the “Esc” key. If you exit the Main menu, the terminal interface program terminates. This is a valid way to end a session. When you exit any menu other than the Main menu, you will be returned to the previous screen.

Figure 4.2 Main Menu Screen

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-3

Page 132: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

CAUTION: If you do not enter a keystroke for 10 minutes, the terminal interface logs you off automatically.

System ScreenThe first option on the Main menu screen is the System screen (Figure 4.3). This screen lets you view and set specific information about the unit in service.

Figure 4.3 System Screen

The System screen displays the fields shown in the table below.

Field Description

Contact Read/write field used to store the name of a point-of-contact for system failure.

Name Read/write field that holds the unit’s name.

Location Read/write field that holds the unit's location.

FrameStart ID Read/write field that holds the unit's ID that uniquely identifies the unit and is used in the FrameStart applications.

Blank Fields Read/write fields for user-specific labels and values. Information resides in non-volatile memory.

Time Read/write field that holds the unit's internal time setting in standard 24-hour HH:MM:SS format.

Date Read/write field that holds the unit's internal date setting in standard MM/DD/YY format.

4-4 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 133: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

NOTICE: Remember that passwords are case-sensitive and are limited to no more than 10 characters. When logging on, password must be entered exactly as it was programmed.

The System screen displays the user-selectable prompts listed in the table below.

Maintenance ResetSelect this prompt to access a screen (Figure 4.4) where you can reset your unit to factory defaults.

Figure 4.4 Maintenance Reset Screen

Using the space bar, you may toggle through the options to select the desired maintenance reset (Default TDM Configuration, Default Packet Configuration, Default Packet 2 Configuration, Default Packet 3 Configuration, or Default

New Admin Password New Read Only Password

Lets you modify your Admin or Read-only password by typing in a new password. Acceptable characters for use in a password are digits 0–9 and letters A–Z and a–z, for a total of 62 distinct characters.

LCD Interface Lets the user enable or disable the LCD interface buttons of the unit.

Prompt Function

Maintenance Reset Brings up a screen where you can reset unit to its default TDM or Packet, Packet 2, Packet 3, or Packet 4 configuration.

Save and Restart Saves the current configuration and restarts the unit.

Field Description

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-5

Page 134: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Packet 4 Configuration). After you select an option, the unit will display a confirmation screen (Figure 4.5) where you may choose either to proceed with the maintenance reset or not.

Figure 4.5 Confirmation Screen

NOTICE: Performing a “Maintenance Reset” or a “Save and Restart” will terminate communications with the unit. Refresh (by pressing “Ctrl+U”) after approximately 10 seconds to restore communications.

Save and RestartSelecting “Save and Restart” will display a confirmation menu similar to that shown in Figure 4.5. Select “yes” to save current configuration settings.

Interfaces ScreenThe WANsuite 5160 Interfaces screen in Figure 4.6 and the WANsuite 5130 Interfaces screen in Figure 4.7 display lists of all the units’ available interfaces.

4-6 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 135: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.6 WANsuite 5160 Interfaces Screen

Figure 4.7 WANsuite 5130 Interfaces Screen

From the 5160 Interfaces screen, you may choose from the following: Network 1, Network 2, Serial 1, Serial 2, 10/100 Ethernet, or Supervisory. From the 5130 Interfaces screen, you may choose from Network, Serial, 10/100 Ethernet, or Supervisory.

Network Screens The Network 1 and Network 2 screens on the 5160 and the Network screen on the 5130 offer the same parameters except for the “Function” parameter, which is found only on the Network 2 Config screen (Figure 4.8). All Network ports operate in the long-haul or short-haul mode. The Network Config screens let you view and make changes to the Network interface's configuration as described below. In addition, these screens provide a table that displays the alarm values for the Network interface.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-7

Page 136: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.8 Network 2 Config Screen (5160 only)

Function (Network 2Only)

In the Slaved function, Network 2 is slaved and can only be mapped to Network 1. In the Network function, Network 2 functions as an independent network, but can only be mapped to Serial 2.

Values: Slaved, NetworkDefault: Slaved

NOTICE: The “Function” parameter fundamentally affects the operation of the unit. Even though this parameter is found only on the Net 2 screen, its setting affects both Network ports and the Service table.

Framing Selects the framing for the network side of the DSU/CSU.

Values ESF, D4Default: ESF

Line Coding Sets the network side line coding.

Values: B8ZS, AMIDefault: B8ZS

PRM Enable Lets you establish which performance messaging standard will be employed to initiate Performance Report Message (PRM) functions. Setting this field to “Enable” instructs the unit to use ANSI T1.403, which sends a PRM once every second. Setting this field to “Disable” instructs the unit to use AT&T TR54016, which provides performance reporting on request only.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

4-8 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 137: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Learn DS0s on Boot Determines if the unit will attempt to discover active DS0s (after power-up, Save and Restart). Active DS0s will then be assigned to the first associated network service.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

Learned DS0 Rate Specifies the rate at which each discovered DS0 will be set.

Values: As 56K/64KDefault: As 64K

NOTICE: The unit will search for active DS0s for a maximum of 7 seconds if learning “As 64k” and for 30 seconds if learning “As 56K.”

Timing Sets the timing source to synchronize the unit’s internal timing generators. In all cases, slips are controlled to occur on frame boundaries at the Network ports when timing synchronization is lost. The options are as follows:

Network 1

“Function” parameter (on the Network 2 Config screen) in Slave mode − Internal, Network 1, Network 2, Serial 1, Serial 2

“Function” parameter (on the Network 2 Config screen) in Network mode − Internal, Network 1, Serial 1

Network 2

“Function” parameter in Slave mode − timing parameter is ignored in Slave mode

“Function” parameter in Network mode − Internal, Network 2, Serial 2

Network (5130) − Internal, Network, Serial

Definitions of the timing sources are as follows:

Internal – The unit’s internal frequency standard (T1 1.544 Mbps ± 50 bps) is used for all timing.

Network 1, Network 2, Network – Timing is derived from the Network port recovered clock.

Serial 1, Serial 2, Serial – Timing is derived from the Serial port recovered clock.

Mode Selects the network service type.

Values: Long Haul, Short HaulDefault: Long Haul

Line Build-Out (LongHaul)

Sets the transmit Line Build Out (LBO) for the Long-Haul network interface.

Values: 0, −7.5, −15.0, −22.5 dBDefault: 0 dB

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-9

Page 138: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

DSX Level (ShortHaul)

Specifies the DTE DSX-1 interface output level.

Values: 0−110, 111−220, 221−330, 331−440, 441−550, 551−660, >661 ftDefault: 0−110 ft

Zero Suppression Determines whether ones density insertion is activated after 15 zeros. This parameter is ignored if the Coding parameter is set to “B8ZS.”

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

Error Status and Alarm Thresholds Table

The unit can be programmed to generate an alarm condition based on a specific level of performance degradation. The Network screens present a table that provides current error status and alarm threshold information.

Acceptable alarm thresholds are set for periods of 1-5, 10, 20, or 30 seconds (900 seconds), and are sampled every second. The error types listed in the following paragraphs can be preset to a value between 0 and 900 seconds. Setting a field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm on that statistic. To effectively disable alarm reporting, set all fields to “0” (zero).

The 15-minute time frame is not based on the TR 54016 or T1.403 interval boundaries, but is a time window based on the accumulated counts over the previous fifteen 1-minute intervals. In all cases, if the number of actual network errored seconds in the previous 15 minutes reaches the preset threshold for the specified error type, an alarm condition is declared.

The four columns of the status table are as follows:

• Status: Displays the current status of the network port.

• Alarm: Displays the alarm value of the network port. The unit declares an alarm as soon as the count exceeds the threshold set.

• Count: Displays the number of events or occurrences of this statistic that have been detected.

• Threshold: Displays a read/write field that can be set to a desirable threshold.

The table provides error status and alarm threshold information for the following error parameters:

ES Sets the Errored Seconds (ES) threshold. An ES is a 1-second period in which at least one logic error occurred. The default value is 45 seconds.

SES Sets the Severely Errored Seconds (SES) threshold. An SES is a 1-second period in which at least 320 CRC errors or one Out-of-Frame (OOF) error occurred. The default value is 5 seconds.

LOSS Sets the Loss of Signal Seconds (LOSS) threshold. A LOSS is 1-second period in which the E1 received signal is interrupted. The default value is 5 seconds.

4-10 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 139: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

UAS Sets the Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold. A UAS is a 1-second period in which consecutive severely errored seconds cause an unavailable state. The default is 0 seconds (Disabled).

CSS Sets the Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) threshold. The default is 0 seconds (Disabled).

BPVS Sets the Bipolar Violation Errored Seconds (BPVS) threshold. A BPVS is a 1-second period in which at least one bipolar violation occurred. The default is 0 seconds (Disabled).

OOFS Sets the Out of Frame Seconds (OOFS) threshold. An OOFS is a 1-second period in which a frame sync loss occurred. The default value is 5 seconds.

AISS Sets the Alarm Indication Signal Seconds (AISS) threshold. An AIS is a 1-second period when unframed all ones are received. The default is 0 seconds (Disabled).

RAS Sets the Remote Alarm Seconds (RAS) threshold. An RAS is generated by the terminal equipment when an improper signal is received from the facility (or upon receipt of unframed all ones). The default is 0 seconds (Disabled).

Reset Timer Sets the Reset Timer threshold. This read/write field is used to establish the contiguous number of seconds that an alarm parameter must be clear before the alarm is reset. Applicable values range from 000 through 900. A value of “000” means the alarm will never be reset.

The Network screens provide the user-selectable prompts described in the table below.

Performance ScreensThe Performance prompt near the bottom of the Network screens displays a Performance 24 Hour screen (Figure 4.9), which provides a summary of the error events that have occurred during each interval of the past 24 hours. In addition to the parameters already defined on the Error Status and Alarm

Prompt Function

Clear Alarms Resets the alarm conditions related to the Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) and counts to zero.

Performance Displays a current count of the number of error events that have occurred over the past 24 hours and the past 30 days.

Learn DS0s Now Learns which DS0s are active and assigns them to the first associated network service. Learned DS0s are based on the idle pattern specified in the Channel Table (see below).

Channels Displays the Channel Table Details screen (found on page 4-25), showing each channel by Index number. Each channel’s rate and service (by number) are displayed and can be changed through user input.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-11

Page 140: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Thresholds Table on page 4-10, the following parameters are included on the Performance screens.

BES A Bursty Error Second (BES) is a 1-second period during which at least more than one but fewer than 320 CRC6 errors occurred.

LOFC The Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) represents the number of time a loss of frame is declared. A loss of frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous loss of signal or OOF.

CRCES A Cyclic Redundancy Check Errored Second (CRCES) is a method of confirming the integrity of received data.

Figure 4.9 Performance 24 Hour Screen

Select the “Performance 30 Day Prompt” on this screen to see a detailed summary of the error events that have occurred during each interval of the past 30 days (Figure 4.10).

Figure 4.10 Performance 30 Day Screen

4-12 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 141: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

CAUTION: Performance data will be lost upon power cycle or after performing a Maintenance Reset/Restart.

Serial ScreensThe Serial 1 and Serial 2 screens on the WANsuite 5160 or Serial screen on the WANsuite 5130 let you view and make changes to the unit’s Serial interface configuration as described below. The parameters on all Serial screens are the same except for the Invert Clock parameter, which is found only on the Serial 2 screen; therefore, the WANsuite 5160 Serial 2 screen (Figure 4.11) is the only one shown below.

To make changes to any Serial parameter, simply set the parameter to the desired selection and press the “Esc” key.

Figure 4.11 Serial 2 Screen

Type This parameter selects the type of interface (based on its electrical signal characteristics) used by the equipment connected to the Serial port.

Values: V.35, RS-232, EIA-530Default: V.35

NOTICE: V.35 requires the use of an optional cable. Refer to Appendix A, “Specifications,” for ordering information.

Mode By default, the Serial port serves as a DCE port in both Packet and TDM modes. However, the Serial port can serve as a DTE port when the unit is in Packet mode.

If the Serial port connects to a DTE device (such as a FRAD or a router), the Mode parameter must be set to “DCE.” If this port connects to a DCE device

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-13

Page 142: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

(like a DSU/CSU), this parameter must be set to “DTE” (valid only for Packet mode, not TDM).

Values: DCE, DTEDefault: DCE

NOTICE: DTE mode requires the use of an optional DTE cable. Refer to Appendix A, “Specifications,” for ordering information.

Packet Rate If the port is running in Packet mode, the Rate must be configured to the desired port speed (in bits per second). In TDM mode, the port speed rate will be set by configuring the next four parameters (Start Channel, Number of Channels, Bundling, and Channel Rate).

Values: Nx56K or Nx64K where N = 1-32Default: 1536 kbps

Bundling Selects whether the DTE channel assignment is made as a “Contiguous” group or as “Alternate” channels. Selecting “Alternate” ensures ones density. Because the unit allows individual channels to be configured for a service, a value of “Arbitrary” will be returned for this parameter if the current channel allocation is not contiguous or Alternate. The “Arbitrary” value can only be supplied by the unit − it cannot be set by the user.

Values: Contiguous, Alternate, ArbitraryDefault: Contiguous

NOTICE: Because “Alternate” Bundling assigns every other channel, only half the channels are available.

Start Channel Selects the starting channel in the 24-channel DS1 bit stream. Starting with the specified channel, the unit automatically assigns the channels that follow.

Values: 1 through 24Default: 1

# of Channels Specifies the number of channels to be assigned to the DTE.

Values: 0 through 24Default: 24 Channel Rate

Channel Rate The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps. If “Νx64K” is selected, the ones density requirements of the T1 network line must be ensured. If “Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0 channel is maintained.

Values: Nx56K, Nx64KDefault: Nx64K

NOTICE: Start Channel, Number of Channels, and Channel Rate cannot be changed if Bundling is not also changed from “Arbitrary.”

4-14 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 143: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Invert Clock In DTE Packet mode, this parameter changes the clock edge of the transmitted data. The Invert Clock parameter is only available for use in DTE mode, and DTE mode is only available for the Serial 2 port. Consequently, this configuration option only works for the Serial 2 port, and should remain disabled when configuring services for the Serial 1 port.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

Tx Clock Selects the clock the unit uses to sample the data transmitted from the DTE. When set to “Internal,” the data is sampled directly with the transmit data clock that is also supplied to the DTE as Transmit Clock. The “External” option uses the external clock from the DTE.

Values: Internal, ExternalDefault: Internal

NOTICE: The “External” option is valid only in Packet mode.

LL The Local Loopback parameter can be set to “Enable” or “Disable.” Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to go into Local Loop when the LL pin on the Serial 1 port goes high. The unit exits the loop when the LL pin goes low. If you select “Disable,” the unit ignores the LL pin on the Serial port.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

NOTICE: For more information on pin assignments, refer to Connector Pin Assignments shown on page A-7.

V54 Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to respond to in-band V.54 loop codes. If you select “Disable,” the unit ignores these codes.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

DTR Alarm Control Lets you set DTR Alarm Control parameters. Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to go into alarm on loss of DTR, which occurs when the Serial port detects that the DTR signal is low.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Disable

DTR Alarm Status Lets you view the current DTR Alarm status.

Format Selects the port’s operating mode.

Values: Sync, AsyncDefault: Sync

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-15

Page 144: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Flow Control Selects the type of flow control to be used if the port is asynchronous.

Values: None, Xon/Xoff, RTS/CTSDefault: None

Character Size Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.

Values: Five, Six, Seven, EightDefault: Eight

Parity Sets the parity bit if the port is asynchronous.

Values: None, Odd, EvenDefault: None

Stop Bit Selects the number of bits required to end the character.

Values: 1, 2Default: 1

CTS The Clear To Send parameter can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or “Internal.” If this parameter is set to “Internal,” the CTS control lead follows the RTS control lead from the DTE after a delay of a duration established by the RTS/CTS Delay parameter. (See RTS/CTS Delay shown on page 4-16)

Values: Forced True, Forced False, InternalDefault: Forced True

DSR Data Set Ready can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or “Internal.” The “Internal” option sets DSR “On” if the port is enabled and “Off” if the port is disabled.

Values: Forced True, Forced False, InternalDefault: Forced True

DCD The Data Carrier Detect parameter can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or “Internal.” If set to “Internal,” DCD is “On” when network carrier is being received from the remote end, and is “Off” when network carrier is not being received from the far end.

Values: Forced True, Forced False, InternalDefault: Forced True

RTS The Request To Send parameter determines the source from which the unit reads the RTS signal status. If set to “Normal,” the unit gets RTS from the DTE on the Serial interface. If set to “Forced True,” RTS is always perceived as “On.”

Values: Normal, Forced TrueDefault: Normal

RTS/CTS Delay The Request To Send/Clear To Send parameter determines how long the unit waits before it changes the level of CTS to match RTS when the CTS parameter is set to “Internal.”

Values: Normal (~30 ms delay), Long (~100 ms delay)Default: Normal

4-16 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 145: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Current Pin Status The Current Pin Status, which shows the state of the RS-232 pins, is also displayed on the Serial interface screens.

10/100 Ethernet (IP Details) ScreenIf you select “Ethernet” from the Interfaces screen, you will bring up an IP Details screen (Figure 4.12) that lets you view and/or modify the IP parameters listed below.

Figure 4.12 IP Details Screen

Unit IP Address A unique Network address assigned to this unit.

Subnet Mask Defines the Network portion of the unit’s IP address.

Gateway IP Address IP address of the default gateway (router) on the LAN side of the unit.

DHCP Client If DHCP Client is enabled at power-up, the unit will request its IP, Mask, and Gateway addresses from a DHCP server located on the LAN side of the unit, and the unit will use these addresses. If the DHCP request is unsuccessful, the unit will use the configured addresses shown on this screen.

Client Identifier Displays a unique identifier for a specific IP address.

Ethernet Enables or disables a remote unit’s Ethernet port.

Physical Address Displays unique MAC address.

NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a 60-second timeout will occur.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-17

Page 146: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

NOTICE: If you manually change the IP address, you must “Save and Restart.” (See Save and Restart on page 4-6.)

Select the Unit Access Table prompt on the Ethernet (IP Details) screen to view the Unit Access Table (Figure 4.13), which specifies up to 10 different IP networks that may access the unit. If no IP networks are supplied, any host can access the unit. Select an <Ndx> number on the table to view the Unit Access Details (Figure 4.14) that correspond with that number.

Figure 4.13 Unit Access Table

Figure 4.14 Unit Access Details

Supervisory Configuration ScreenThe Supervisory Configuration screen (Figure 4.15) displays the current speed of the Supervisory port interface along with other parameters as described below. The Supervisory port supports only asynchronous character formats.

4-18 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 147: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.15 Supervisory Configuration Screen

Speed Changes the Supervisory port speed (in bits per second).

Values: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200Default: 19200

Character Size Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.

Values: Five, Six, Seven, EightDefault: Eight

Parity Sets the parity bit.

Values: None, Odd, EvenDefault: None

Stop Bit Selects the number of bits required to end the character.

Values: 1, 2Default: 1

DTR Alarm Control Lets you set DTR Alarm Control parameters. Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to go into alarm on loss of DTR, which occurs when the Supervisory port detects that the DTR signal is low.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Disable

DTR Alarm Status Lets you view the current DTR Alarm status.

Diagnostic Messages Enables the Supervisory port to send out diagnostic messages upon power-up.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

NOTICE: When in SCADA mode, these diagnostic messages disrupt the connected device. Therefore, if using the SCADA mode, set this value to “Disable.”

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-19

Page 148: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Current Pin Status The Current Pin Status, which shows the state of the RS-232 pins, is also displayed on the Supervisory interface screen.

Service Table ScreenThe Service Table screen (Figure 4.16) displays the unit’s defined services and the displays the Interface, Type, Pair, and Status parameters for each service.

Figure 4.16 Service Table Screen

The Status for a particular service will display as one of the following:

• Dead − The service is not functional because required resources are not available.

• Changed − The service parameter was changed and a Save and Restart is required for the service to function.

• Down − The service is not able to pass data because the physical layer is down.

• Physical Up − The service is not able to pass data because it has not completed any required negotiations.

• Up − The service is ready to pass data.

• Idle − The service has nothing to do.

The Service Table screen displays the available services listed by Index number. To view more detailed information about a service, navigate to one of the Details screen (such as the Service Details screen described on page 4-23) by selecting from and entry under the “Index” column (Service Details), the <Interface> column (Interface Details), or <Type> column (Type Details). To add a service, select the “Add Service prompt at the top of the screen.

Data Line Monitor Configuration TableSelect the Data Line Monitor prompt at the top of the Service Table screen to view a screen that displays SCADA port information (Figure 4.17).

4-20 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 149: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.17 Data Line Monitor Config Table

Service Enable andDisable

Displays whether capture is Enabled or Disabled.

Tx/Rx Filter Displays the direction of the captured data.

Pattern Filter Enable Displays the Filter for the pattern being searched and captured.

Pattern Displays which specific pattern is being searched for.

Mask Displays the bits the unit is looking for.

Offset Displays the offset in the packet that matches the pattern.

You may view the captured data in the Packet Capture screen (Figure 4.18) by selecting the prompt at the top of the Data Line Monitor screen. The screen shows about 10 lines of active data, and if a line is selected, the screen will display further decoded data below.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-21

Page 150: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.18 Packet Capture Screen

Mode The two modes available are “Analyze” and “Live.” The Live mode lets you capture data and create a usable text file of the captured data. In Analyze mode, the packet switch will return the data via the Data Line Monitor Packet Table, whereas in the Live mode the Data Line Monitor Packet Table will appear empty for SNMP calls.

Buffer Management Displays whether displayed data is set to “Wrap” or “Stop on Full.”

The Data Line Monitor Service Details screen (Figure 4.19) is displayed by selecting the appropriate Services link on the Data Line Monitor Config Table screen. You use this screen to define the parameters listed above.

Figure 4.19 Data Line Monitor Details Screen

4-22 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 151: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Service Details Screen

From the Service Details screen, you can access and change the parameters listed below. The new parameters are saved when you press the “Esc” key and return to the previous screen.

Figure 4.20 Service Details Screen

Interface Selecting one of the interfaces will bring up a screen where you can view interface parameters. These screens are the same ones displayed when you select a sub-menu from the Interfaces menu described earlier on page 4-7.

NOTICE: One of the Interface options is “Virtual.” PPP is the only service that may be attached to the Virtual interface. You would choose the Virtual interface for PPP if you elected to run PPP over Frame Relay. When you attach PPP to the Virtual interface, you must supply an endpoint over which to send PPP encapsulated data, and that endpoint must be for a Frame Relay DLCI.

Type Selecting one of the services listed under the “Type” column will bring up a screen where you can view (and, in some cases, change) parameters for each type of service. The details displayed depend on the type of service (TDM, PPP, Frame Relay, SCADA, IP, or tty) currently in effect. These screens are shown and described below according to each type of service.

Pair User-assigned integer field that specifies where to route the traffic from this Service. If the Service is terminated by the unit, set this value to “0” (zero).

Select the “Delete Service” prompt to remove the currently configured service identified by the Service Details screen. Deleting the selected service will remove all references to this service.

After selecting “Delete Service,” you will be presented with a confirmation screen similar to the one shown in Figure 4.5. Select “Yes” to confirm removal of the selected service.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-23

Page 152: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

DS0 Monitor Details Screen (5160 Only)To access the DS0 Monitor Details Screen (Figure 4.21), click on “TDM” in the <Type> column on the Service Table screen. This screen lets you configure what are considered high and low DS0 utilization parameters, and will report alarms if the monitored statistics rise above or fall below those specified settings. This helps determine customer load patterns so that channel bandwidth can be reallocated as necessary.

Figure 4.21 DS0 Monitor Details Screen

Number of DS0s Number of active DS0s (0−24) assigned on a per-service basis.

Alarm Reset Timer(sec)

Number of seconds that an alarm condition must not be present before an alarm is reset. Zero (0) indicates the Alarm Reset Timer is disabled.

Values: 0−900Default: 30

High Utilization % Lets you configure as a percent what is considered high utilization.

Values: 1−100Default: 100

High Threshold (sec) Lets you configure a high-utilization threshold (in seconds), above which an alarm will report.

Values: 0−900Default: 0 (Disabled)

End of Day LowUtilization %

Lets you configure as a percent what is considered low utilization at the end of the day. If the utilization is below this level when the day ends, an alarm reports.

Values: 0−100Default: 0 (Disabled)

DS0 Status and Alarm Table

Each second, the TDM services will count the number of active DS0s and update their statistics. You must refresh your screen to view the updated

4-24 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 153: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

statistics. This table also gives the status of the alarms (OK, Alarmed) related to DS0s.

The user-activated prompts listed below are at the bottom of the DS0 Monitor Details screen.

Figure 4.22 Channel Table Details Screen

The Channel Table Details screen lets you establish the Rate, Service, and Idle Pattern parameters for any available channel. The screen parameters are described below.

Rate The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps.

Values: 56K, 64KDefault: 64K

Service Specifies the service to which this channel is allocated. Refer to the Service Table to see how the current services are configured.

Idle Pattern Selects the DS0 idle pattern sent by the unit and lets the unit determine if the DS0 idle pattern has been sent by the other end.

Values: 0−FF (Hex)Default: 7F

Prompt Function

Clear Alarms Clears all utilization alarms.

Channels Displays the Channel Table details for the Network 1, Network 2, or Network services (Figure 4.22)

DS0 24 Hour History Displays DS0 monitor history in 15-min buckets for the past 24 hours (Figure 4.23).

DS0 30 Day History Displays DS0 monitor history in 24-hr buckets for the past 30 days (Figure 4.24).

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-25

Page 154: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.23 DS0 Monitor 24 Hour History Screen

Figure 4.24 DS0 Monitor 30 Day History Screen

The DS0 Monitor 24 Hour History and 30 Day History screens show the following statistics for the specified period.

Period Period for which the DS0 monitor history is displayed.

Timestamp System-up-time value during which the utilization historical period was completed.

% Utilization of DS0(s) Percent of DS0s utilized (−1, 0−100) over the period. A −1 indicates an invalid value or unavailable data.

High Utilization (sec) Number of seconds (0−900) greater than or equal to the high utilization parameter specified for the period in the utilization alarm table.

Frame Relay Service Details ScreenAccess the Frame Relay Service Details screen (Figure 4.25) by selecting “Frame Relay” under the <Type> column on the Service Table screen.

4-26 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 155: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.25 Frame Relay Service Details Screen

The Frame Relay Service Details screen displays Service, Pair, and Interface details across the top of the screen. Fields shown at the top of the Frame Relay Service Details screen are described below.

Screen parameters that can be viewed and/or changed are listed below. To save new parameters, press the “Esc” key.

Interface Type If this service is connected to a Frame Relay network, the Interface Type should be set to “UNI” as it is the user side of a User-to-Network interface. If it is connected to a FRAD/router, the Interface Type should be set to “NI” as it is the network side of a User-to-Network interface. If it is connected to an equipment set for Network-to-Network interface, the Interface Type should be set to “NNI.”

Values: UNI, NI, NNIDefault: UNI if interface is Network, NI if interface is Serial

Link Management This parameter should be set to the link management used by the equipment connected to it. If set to “Auto,” the unit will learn the link management type and display it on the status portion of this screen.

Field Description

Active Read-only status (No, Yes)

LMI Type Read-only status

FrameStart Status Read-only status

Round Trip Delay (bytes)

Specifies the frame size of packets making round-trip.

Round Trip Rate (sec) Specifies the rate at which Round Trip Delay packets are sent.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-27

Page 156: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Once it discovers the link management type, the unit should be set to the discovered value so that subsequent unit or network re-initialization will be faster.

Values: Auto, CCITT, ANSI, LMI, NoneDefault: ANSI

Max Frame Size If Auto Diagnostic is set to “Yes,” the unit will discard received frames that are larger than the maximum frame size. If Auto Diagnostic is set to “No,” these large received frames will be sent, but will be counted in the Rx Invalid statistics.

Values: 64–4096Default: 2500

N1 Indicates the number of “keep alive” status inquiries that are sent between full status requests.

Values: 5–255Default: 5 if interface is Network (UNI), 6 if interface is Serial (NI).

N2 Specifies the total number of link reliability and protocol errors that can occur during the sliding event monitor count defined by N3. If this count is exceeded, the port is declared inactive.

Values: 1–255Default: 3

N3 Represents a Monitored Events Count. For a network, a monitored event is the receipt of a status inquiry message or the expiration of the polling verification timer T2. For a FRAD, a monitored event is the transmission of a status inquiry message. This parameter defines the size of the sliding window used by the unit to determine whether a channel or user device is active.

Values: 5–255Default: 4

T1 Specifies the number of seconds the unit waits between issuing status enquiry messages.

Values: 5–30Default: 10

Tx Threshold Number of bits per second sent during a 15-minute interval after which a Tx alarm will be triggered. A value of “0” (zero) disables this trap.

Values: 0–4294967295Default: 0

Tx Alarm Status of this alarm (OK, Alarmed).

4-28 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 157: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Rx Threshold Number of bits per second sent during a 15-minute interval after which an Rx alarm will be triggered. A value of “0” (zero) disables this trap.

Values: 0–4294967295Default: 0

Rx Alarm Status of this alarm (OK, Alarmed).

Default CIR (bps) The Committed Information Rate (in bits per second) provided by your frame relay service provider. The unit will apply this value to each DLCI learned from the network side to gather statistics and to perform CIR enforcement, if required. If a DLCI is configured with a CIR different from the default, the DLCI configuration will be used instead.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Default Be Rate (bps) The Excess Burst Rate (in bits per second) provided by your frame relay service provider. The unit will apply this value to each DLCI learned from the network side to gather statistics and to perform CIR enforcement, if required. If a DLCI is configured with an Excess Burst different from the default, the DLCI configuration will be used instead.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Enforce CIR and Be If this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will enforce Committed Information Rate and Excess Burst.

Values: No, YesDefault: No

NOTICE: The Auto Diagnostic parameter must be set to “Yes” to enforce CIR and Be.

Management DLCI If this parameter is set to “0,” the unit will look for management traffic on any DLCI. If set to a number associated with a specific DLCI, the unit will look for management traffic on that DLCI only.

Management Auto IPDLCI

If this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will monitor the specified DLCI for 5 pings over 5 seconds, after which the unit uses the destination address as its management IP address.

FrameStart AutoDiagnostic

When this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will always source LMI on both sides of the frame relay connection. The unit will dynamically learn the type of link management used on each side of the connection (Network and Serial).

When set to “No,” the unit will forward each LMI message to its service pair. If one side of the pair goes down, the other side will stop receiving LMI.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-29

Page 158: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

FrameStart Auto Diagnostic mode should be left set to “Yes” unless the frame relay connection has more that 128 DLCIs, or if there is a very high traffic rate on a constant basis.

Values: No, YesDefault: Yes

FrameStart AutoDiscovery

When this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will send FrameStart discovery and delay frames to each DLCI it learns as soon as the DLCIs are set active. This is required to calculate round-trip delay as well as to discover remote WANsuite 5160/5130/FSE units. This parameter should be set to “Yes” only on network services that have a WANsuite 5160/5130/FSE at the far end of the frame relay connection.

Values: No, YesDefault: No

Normal Tx Queue Size Each Frame Relay service has two distinct transmit queues: one for normal-priority traffic and one for high-priority traffic. At this time, only SCADA and TCP Server traffic are considered high-priority and are placed in the high-priority queue. All other types of traffic are placed in the normal-priority queue.

This parameter defines how many normal priority frames can be put in front of a high-priority frame. The software always checks for high-priority frames before placing normal-priority frames in the transmit queue. However, once the frames are in the hardware transmit queue, their order of transmission cannot be changed.

If SCADA and/or TCP Server are not up, set this parameter to 28 (the default). If SCADA and/or TCP Server are up, set this parameter according to the SCADA host system’s ability to support higher latency. For example, if a SCADA host system has a timeout of 500 ms when polling remote devices through a DDS Frame Relay service, the Normal Tx Queue Size parameter should be set to 2. This would allow two 1500-byte IP frames to be sent between SCADA frames without reaching the 500-ms limit. If the SCADA host application has a timeout lower than 500 ms, this parameter should be set to 1. This then ensures a minimum latency for SCADA applications. However, it will slow IP traffic since only one IP frame at a time can be placed in the hardware transmit queue.

RFC1315 Trap When this parameter is set to “Enable,” the unit will send the standard RFC1315 frame relay DTE circuit state change trap every time a DLCI changes state, provided at least one destination IP address for trap is configured in the SNMP configuration.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

Rx Invalid Threshold Number of invalid frames received during a 15-minute interval after which an Rx invalid alarm will be triggered. A value of “0” (zero) disables this trap.

Values: 0–4294967295Default: 0

4-30 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 159: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Rx Invalid Alarm Status of this alarm (OK, Alarmed).

User prompts at the bottom of the Frame Relay Services Details screen are described in the following table.

Frame Relay Statistics ScreenSelect the “Frame Relay Statistics” prompt to bring up a table (Figure 4.26) that reports on the status and condition of LMI parameters and on Receive/Transmit alarms and thresholds. Alarm threshold levels may be changed by entering a new threshold value in the appropriate field on the Frame Relay Service Details screen and pressing the “Esc” key.

Figure 4.26 Frame Relay Statistics Screen

To view the Port Statistics (Figure 4.27) for a specific interval, select that interval from the Frame Relay Statistics <Period> column.

Prompt Function

Frame Relay Statistics

Opens the Frame Relay Statistics screen for the current frame relay service.

Clear Alarms Clears all Frame Relay alarms.

Pair Type Details Opens another Frame Relay Service Details screen that reverses the service and the pair so that you can view both sides of the pair.

DLCI Table Opens the DLCI Table screen, which displays all the DLCIs on the current service. Refer to DLCI Table Screen on page 4-49 for more information.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-31

Page 160: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.27 Frame Relay Port Statistics Screen

Transmit

Frames Number of frames transmitted by the port.

Octets Number of octets transmitted by the port.

Mgmt Frames Number of management frames transmitted by the port.

Mgmt Octets Number of management octets transmitted by the port.

Stat Inquiries Number of octets transmitted in frame relay LMI status inquiries.

Stat Responses Number of octets transmitted in frame relay LMI status responses.

Receive

Frames Number of frames received by the port.

Octets Number of octets received by the port.

Mgmt Frames Number of management frames received by the port.

Mgmt Octets Number of management octets received by the port.

FECN Number of Forward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received.

BECN Number of Backward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received.

Invalids Number of invalid frames received.

Stat Inquiries Number of octets received in frame relay LMI status inquiries.

Stat Responses Number of octets received in frame relay LMI status responses.

Invalid LMIs Number of invalid Local Management Interface frames received.

4-32 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 161: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Throughput (bits/sec)

Peak Peak bandwidth (in bps) as measured over a 10-second period.

Average Average bandwidth (in bps) used by the port.

Period Index Selects the interval (Current, Summary, or 1-96) to be viewed on the Frame Relay Port Statistics screen.

PPP Service Details ScreenThe PPP Service Details screen (Figure 4.28) gives you access to configuration parameters that can be viewed/changed as described in the following paragraphs. To save new parameters, press the “Esc” key.

Figure 4.28 PPP Service Details Screen

ACCM The Asynchronous Control Character Map (ACCM) configuration option provides a method to negotiate the use of control character transparency on asynchronous links.

Values: 0–FFFFFFFF (Hex)Default: FFFFFFFF

MRU The Maximum Receive Units (MRU) configuration option may be set to inform the peer that the implementation can receive larger packets, or to request that the peer send smaller packets.

Values: 128–4096Default: 1500

Port IP Address The IP Address of the port. For unnumbered PPP link, set to 0.0.0.0 and set IP Address Negotiation to “No.”

Default: 192.168.1.2

Peer IP Address Enter the IP address of the peer that will negotiate authentication protocols.

Default: 192.168.1.3

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-33

Page 162: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Virtual PPP Over Endpoint name over which to send PPP encapsulated data (i.e., PPP over Frame Relay). Valid only when the PPP interface is Virtual.

Auth ChallengeInterval

The time interval (in seconds) between CHAP challenges. A value of “0” (zero) disables the periodic authentication challenge.

Values: 0−3600Default: 0 (disabled)

Allow PAP This parameter lets the peer negotiate for PAP.

Values: No, YesDefault: No

Allow CHAP This parameter lets the peer negotiate for CHAP.

Values: No, YesDefault: No

PAP Username Type the appropriate PAP Username in this field to log on to the peer.

Values: (User Established)Default: Username

PAP Password Enter the password necessary to log on to the peer under a given PAP Username.

Values: (User Established)Default: (None)

CHAP Username Type the appropriate CHAP Hostname in this field to challenge the peer.

Values: (User Established)Default: Hostname

CHAP Secret Enter the Secret (i.e., password) necessary to challenge the peer.

Values: (User Established)Default: Secret

Initiate Negotiation Determines whether the port actively negotiates with the peer site or passively waits for negotiation requests.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: Yes

Parameters to NegotiateThe table displayed near the bottom of the PPP Service Details screen shows which parameters are set to be negotiated. You can specify which parameters

4-34 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 163: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

should be negotiated by selecting the desired option. The table below describes the parameters that can be negotiated.

PPP Statistics

Selecting the “PPP Statistics” prompt brings up a table (Figure 4.29) that reports on traffic.

Parameter Description

Protocol Header Compression

Compresses PPP protocol headers.Default = Yes

IPCP Compression Compresses TCP headers using Van Jacobsen compression. Default = Yes

MRU Informs the peer that the implementation can receive larger packets, or requests that the peer send smaller packets.Default = Yes

HDLC Address Compression

Negotiates the compression of high-level data link control (HDLC) addresses.Default = Yes

IP Address Dynamically negotiates for IP addresses; otherwise, it is assumed both sides know each other’s IP addresses.Default = Yes

ACCM Negotiates the use of control character transparency on asynchronous links. Default = Yes

Magic Number Unique numbers useful for detecting loopbacks.Default = Yes

PAP Authentication scheme used by PPP servers to validate the identity of the originator of the connection. Default = No

CHAP Authentication scheme used by PPP servers to validate the identity of the originator of the connection upon connection or at any later time.Default = No

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-35

Page 164: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.29 PPP Statistics Screen

Period Selects the interval (Current, Summary, or numbered Interval) to be viewed on the PPP Statistics screen.

Tx Frames Number of frames transmitted by the port.

Tx Octets Number of octets transmitted by the port.

Rx Frames Number of frames received by the port.

Rx Octets Number of octets received by the port.

Average Average bandwidth (in bps) used by the port.

Peak Peak bandwidth (in bps) as measured over a 10-second period.

PAP TableAt the bottom of the PPP Services Details screen are prompts that, if selected, display tables for PAP and CHAP details. The PAP Table (Figure 4.30) displays the Usernames and Passwords for 10 entries.

4-36 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 165: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.30 PAP Table Screen

PAP Details Screen

To change the Username and Password for a selected PAP Index, access the PAP Details screen by selecting the applicable Index number in the PAP Table. Enter the new information in the appropriate field(s) and press the “Esc” key.

To delete the Username and Password for a selected PAP Index, delete the character string displayed in both fields (leaving them blank) and press the “Esc” key.

Figure 4.31 PAP Details Screen

CHAP Table and Details ScreensFrom the PPP Service Details screen, select “CHAP Table” to view a table of the CHAP Username and Secret information for each of 10 entries. This table and its Details screen look the same as the PAP Table and Details screens.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-37

Page 166: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Choose an Index number to bring up a screen in which you can change the Username and Secret information for that particular CHAP Index.

To change the Username and Secret for a selected CHAP Index, enter the new information in the appropriate field(s) and press the “Esc” key.

SCADA Service Details Screen

NOTICE: SCADA traffic has a higher priority than other types of traffic flowing through the unit. Refer to Normal Tx Queue Size on page 4-30 for more details.

The SCADA Service Details (Figure 4.32) screen lets you access and read or change the parameters listed below.

Figure 4.32 SCADA Service Details Screen

Message Size Maximum number of octets to buffer before sending a frame.

Values: 0−1024Default: 256

Idle Character Delay Maximum number of idle character time required before sending a frame.

Values: 0−65535Default: 0

Input Terminator Decimal value of the character that terminates a message before sending a frame.

Values: 0−255Default: 0

Data Direction Data direction that the port will support. If set to “Input,” the port will only accept incoming data and will not transmit data. If set to “Output,” the port will ignore any incoming data. If set to “Both,” the port will process all data.

Values: Input, Output, BothDefault: Both

4-38 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 167: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

SCADA Loopback Determines if and where SCADA will loopback received data.

Values: None, Loopback to Network, Loopback to PortDefault: None

The table below these parameters displays the SCADA statistics. You can clear all SCADA statistics by selecting the “SCADA Clear Statistics” prompt at the bottom of the screen.

Select the “SCADA Device List” prompt to bring up a screen that shows the mapping between SCADA devices and endpoints (Figure 4.33).

Figure 4.33 SCADA Device List

Press “Enter” after selecting the device number to display the SCADA Device Details (Figure 4.34) menu that lets you map SCADA devices to endpoints.

Figure 4.34 SCADA Device Details

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-39

Page 168: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

IP Service Details ScreenThe IP Service Details screen (Figure 4.12), accessed by selecting “IP” from the <Type> column in the IP Service screen, lets you configure the IP parameters described on page 4-17.

To change any of the available parameters, you must enter new values in the appropriate field(s) and press the “Esc” key to save your changes.

NOTICE: To use newly established IP parameters, you must “Save and Restart.” (See "Save and Restart" on page 4-6.)

ApplicationsSelect “Applications” in the Main Menu screen to display the various WANsuite 5160/5130 applications (Figure 4.35) associated with configuration tables and statistics for Layer 3 and above that do not map to a specific service or interface.

Figure 4.35 Applications Screen

Endpoint Table ScreenThe Endpoint Table (Figure 4.36) describes all endpoints terminating in the unit; user-selectable prompts are provided to view the Endpoint Details, Endpoint Service Details, and DLCI Details screens. The unit will automatically learn all DLCIs from the network side and relay that information on the serial side with default values.

4-40 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 169: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The Endpoint Table and its corresponding DLCIs will be saved in the configuration database either when you perform a “Save and Restart” or automatically every 15 minutes.

NOTICE: The Endpoint Table and its corresponding DLCIs will be saved in the configuration database only after at least one endpoint parameter has been changed and submitted in the Endpoint Details Screen on page 4-42. When in IP Gateway, if you decide to use a “discovered” endpoint, you must rename it. A discovered endpoint cannot be used elsewhere (i.e., IP Gateway) until it has been renamed. Also, it will not be saved in the configuration database.

NOTICE: Endpoint names of the form PPP-Sn and SCADA-Sn are reserved by the system. These system-generated endpoints cannot be modified.

Figure 4.36 Endpoint Table Screen

You can add an endpoint in the Add Endpoint field and, when the screen refreshes, you will be able to view that endpoint’s associated parameters. For most applications, you will not have to modify the Endpoint Table and DLCI Table.

Endpoint Details Screen

Select the <NDX> number to view the Endpoint Details screen (Figure 4.37), which provides you with access to the configuration parameters described below.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-41

Page 170: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.37 Endpoint Details Screen

Name When the unit learns a new DLCI, it creates an endpoint entry and a DLCI entry if they are not already configured. The endpoint’s Name will automatically be assigned as “Dynamic”; however, this name can (and most likely should) be changed to reflect a remote location name. Submitting a changed Name parameter will cause the endpoint entry and its corresponding DLCI entry to be saved in the configuration database.

Value: A string of up to 11 charactersDefault: None

CAUTION: When configuring endpoints, the name you assign each endpoint in the Name parameter field must be unique within the unit.

Service The Service Index number (from the Service Table) on which this DLCI was found or configured.

Values: Displays the currently active Services (by Index number) or the Service(s) on which the DLCI was discovered.

Default: 0

DLCI The DLCI number.

Values: 16–1023Default: 0

Forward Endpoint By default, each DLCI is switched to its pair service in the Service Table using the same DLCI number. If this endpoint has to be switched to a different DLCI or a different service, the endpoint index of the destination must be configured here.

For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.

Values: 0–256Default: 0

4-42 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 171: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Backup Endpoint If this DLCI has an alternative endpoint to switch to in case this DLCI becomes inactive, you would configure the endpoint index of this alternate endpoint here.

For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.

Values: 0–256Default: 0

SLP ReferenceEndpoint

Use this reference endpoint index for the SLA parameters. As most applications have the same SLAs for all DLCIs, they only need to be configured in one DLCI entry. You can then copy all SLA parameters from the endpoint index of this configured DLCI. If no SLP reference endpoint is configured and the DLCI SLA parameters are not configured, the values in the Frame Relay Service Details will be used (default CIR, Be, enforcement).

For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.

Values: 0–256Default: 0

Remote IP Address If this WANsuite 5160/5130 unit is to be used to manage a remote WANsuite 5160/5130 unit, you must configure the IP address of the remote WANsuite 5160/5130 unit here. This DLCI can be used for management only, or for management and actual data.

If this parameter is set, a PC connected to the LAN interface of this WANsuite 5160/5130 can reach a remote WANsuite 5160/5130 through this DLCI. The remote IP address must be part of an IP network that is different from the local WANsuite 5160/5130, and the local WANsuite 5160/5130's IP address must be configured into the PC. This way, local and remote WANsuite 5160/5130s can be reached regardless of the availability of the routers connected at the back of the WANsuite 5160/5130s.

Values: IP addressDefault: 0.0.0.0

Remote IP Mask If the Remote IP Address is set, the Remote IP Mask must also be set.

Values: IP addressDefault: 0.0.0.0

Type If data received from this DLCI has to be switched to its corresponding destination port, you must set the type to “Switched.” Set the type to “Local” if this DLCI will be used for management purposes only.

Values: Switched, LocalDefault: Switched

Delete Endpoint You may delete any endpoint.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-43

Page 172: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Endpoint Service Details Screen

Selecting from the <Svc> column on the Endpoint Table screen displays the typical Service Details screen (page 4-23) in which you can view, and in some cases change, parameters including Index, Interface, Type, and Pair. A “Delete Service” prompt is also included on this screen.

DLCI Details Screen

The DLCI Details screen (Figure 4.38) lets you access the configuration parameters described in the following paragraphs. To bring up this screen, select any DLCI from the <DLCI> column on the Endpoint Table screen.

Figure 4.38 DLCI Details Screen

The unit uses the first three configuration parameters (Protocol Encapsulation, Proprietary Traffic Type, and Proprietary Offset) to gather statistics. For in-band management, “RFC 1490” must be the encapsulation method.

Protocol Encapsulation The type of encapsulation used by the FRAD/router connected to the unit.

Values: RFC 1490, ProprietaryDefault: RFC 1490

Proprietary TrafficType

When Protocol Encapsulation is set for “Proprietary,” the Proprietary Traffic Type parameter defines which protocol is encapsulated.

Values: IP, IPX, Ethertype, NoneDefault: None

Proprietary Offset When Protocol Encapsulation is set for “Proprietary,” the Proprietary Offset parameter defines the number of octets after the frame relay header where the proprietary traffic type starts.

Values: 0–64Default: 0

4-44 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 173: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

CIR (bps) If a Committed Information Rate is configured here, its value (in bits per second) will be used instead of the default CIR of the frame relay service.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Be (bps) If an Excess Burst Rate is configured here, its value (in bits per second) will be used instead of the default excess burst of the frame relay service.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Bc (bps) If CIR enforcement is configured to “Yes,” the unit will throttle the Committed Burst down to this value (in bits per second) when frames are received with the BECN bit set.

Values: 0–1536000Default: 0

Discard Eligible Flag If this parameter is set to “Yes,” and CIR enforcement is also set to “Yes,” the unit will set the Discard Eligible (DE) bit for frames sent over CIR.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

In Band Management If the unit is to be used as a gateway to reach a remote WANsuite 5160/5130 through this DLCI, set this parameter to “Yes,” and configure the remote IP address and Mask in the corresponding endpoint.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

FrameStart Delay If this parameter is set to “Enable,” the unit will send FrameStart discovery and delay frames on this DLCI, and will report the state of the remote Verilink unit. It will also send SOS frames when the FRAD/router connected to this unit goes inactive.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable if Auto Discovery is set to “Yes”; otherwise Disable

FrameStart Status If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology and FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, the FrameStart Status field will show the status of the remote unit. The status is “Active” if both the local and remote DLCIs are active and the remote unit answers to the discovery frames sent by this unit. The status is “SOS” if the remote unit is active but the FRAD/router connected to it is inactive. The status is “Inactive” in all other cases.

Values: Active, Inactive, SOSDefault: Inactive

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-45

Page 174: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Remote DLCI If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology, and FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, this field displays the DLCI number used on the remote end of this DLCI.

Values: 16−1023Default: 0

Remote Unit If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology, and FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, this field displays the first three digits of the unit ID configured on the remote end of this DLCI.

Values: 000−999Default: 000

Remote IP Address Displays the IP address of the remote Verilink unit with FrameStart technology if FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled.

Round Trip Delay Specifies the frame size (in bytes) of packets making round-trip.

Round Trip Rate Specifies the rate (in seconds) at which Round Trip Delay packets are sent.

DLCI Status Table

The bottom portion of the screen shows a table detailing the actual status of this DLCI and alarm threshold information as follows:

Status If this DLCI is up, the status will be “Active”; otherwise, the status will be “Inactive.”

Values: Active, InactiveDefault: Inactive

Receiving FECN/BECN

When a frame is received with congestion bit set, this parameter is set to “Yes.” It is set back to “No” when a frame is received without congestion bit set.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

CIR Threshold Sets the Tx over CIR alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of bits per second in excess of CIR during a 15-minute interval. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm.

CIR Alarm Reports if the Tx over CIR threshold has been exceeded.

Bits Over Be Threshold Sets the Tx over Be alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of bits per second in excess of CIR + Be during a 15-minute interval. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm.

Bits Over Be Alarm Reports if the Tx over Be threshold has been exceeded.

4-46 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 175: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Congestion Threshold Sets the Rx Congestion alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of frames received with BECN/FECN. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm.

Congestion Alarm Reports if the Rx Congestion threshold has been exceeded.

BECN in CIR Reports if Backward Explicit Congestion Notification (BECN) has been received within CIR.

UAS Threshold Sets the Unavailable Seconds (UAS) alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of seconds after which the DLCI is unavailable. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm.

UAS Alarm Reports if the UAS threshold has been exceeded.

DLCI Statistics Screen

Selecting “DLCI Statistics” on the DLCI Details screen will display the screen shown in Figure 4.39.

Figure 4.39 DLCI Statistics Screen

This screen displays all ninety-six 15-minute buckets available for DLCI statistics. If the unit is powered on at 01:00 PM, the first interval will be completed at 01:15 PM; subsequent intervals would be completed at xx:30, xx:45, xx:00 and xx:15. Interval 1 is always the latest (most recent) interval, and interval 96 will always be the oldest.

The first row of the DLCI Statistics screen shows a summary that includes all 96 buckets. You can choose to see the statistics for any given bucket by selecting the desired <Period> and pressing the “Enter” key, which displays the DLCI Statistics Details screen. The MIB (ipadv2.mib) describes each available statistic.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-47

Page 176: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

DLCI Statistics Details Screen

Select from the <Period> column to display the DLCI Statistics Details screen (Figure 4.40) for a specific period or interval. The parameters on this screen are described below.

Figure 4.40 DLCI Statistics Details Screen

The DLCI Statistics screen in the preceding figure shows a summary that includes all 96 buckets. You can choose to see the statistics for any given bucket by selecting a specific interval under the <Period> column on the DLCI Statistics screen. The MIB (ipadv2.mib) describes each available statistic. “FDR” on the screen above refers to Frame Delivery Ratio, which is the ration of successful frame receptions to attempted frame transmissions. “DDR” refers to Data Delivery Ratio or the ratio of successful payload bytes received to attempted payload bytes transmitted. “DE,” or Discard Eligible, refers to the data that is first eligible to be discarded when network congestion occurs.

DLCI Table Screen

You can access the DLCI Table screen from the Frame Relay Service Details Screen shown on page 4-27. The DLCI Table screen displays a table of all DLCIs on a specific frame relay service along with their state and alarm conditions.

4-48 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 177: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.41 DLCI Table Screen

Service Aware ScreenThe Service Aware function recognizes IP traffic and counts the number of frames and bytes passed for a specific service based on filters by DLCI, by IP Address, and by IP Port. Each row of the Service Aware table represents a specific set of filter parameters known as a “rule.” Each rule is established through the Rule Config screen, which is accessed by selecting “Rule Details.”

The Service Aware screen (Figure 4.42) provides a table showing these filtered packet counts for up to 10 rules. This table indicates which Service Aware filters are enabled or disabled, and shows the specific DLCI, IP Address, and IP Port by which the IP traffic is filtered. In addition, this table shows the Tx Alarm Threshold and the current Tx Alarm status (if enabled) for each rule.

It is also possible to filter PPP services, in which case all information related to DLCIs is ignored.

Figure 4.42 Service Aware Screen

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-49

Page 178: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Rule Configuration Screen

Select from the <Ndx> column to bring up the Rule Config screen (Figure 4.43) to establish Service Aware parameters. To establish a rule, select the desired rule configuration options, provide the appropriate filter information where required, and press the “Esc” key.

Figure 4.43 Rule Config Screen

The paragraphs below describe the rule configuration parameters and their options.

Service Selects the service to which the rule applies.

NOTICE: If you change the Service parameter, you must press the “Enter” key to see the appropriate DLCIs.

DLCI Selects the DLCI to which the rule applies.

Filter By DLCI Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic in accordance with the previously specified DLCI.

NOTICE: To use this filter, you must specify both the Service and DLCI parameters in the rule configuration.

IP Address Establishes the IP address by which the rule will filter IP traffic (if enabled).

IP Mask Represents a range of IP addresses defined so that only machines with IP addresses within the range defined by the mask are allowed to access an Internet service. To mask a portion of the IP address, replace it with the wild card character “0” (zero). (For example, 192.44.0.0 represents every computer on the Internet with an IP address beginning with 192.44.)

4-50 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 179: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Filter By IP Address Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the IP address specified in the IP Address or IP Mask field.

Enter IP Port or SelectFrom List

Establishes the IP port by which the rule will filter IP traffic (if enabled).

Filter By IP Port Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the IP port specified in the IP Port field.

Tx Alarm Threshold Specifies the threshold in bits per second for the Transmit Alarm on this rule.

Tx Alarm Shows the current Transmit Alarm status.

Traffic Meter Statistics Screen

The Traffic Meter Statistics screen (Figure 4.44), which can be accessed from the bottom of the Rule Config screen, displays the number of frames and octets sent over a DLCI that have been counted in accordance with the Service Aware “rule” that has been established for a Service. As such, it is frame relay specific (i.e., DLCIs only occur in frame relay links). In addition, this screen provides data rate performance information for the period of time you have specified in the Period field (see below).

Figure 4.44 Traffic Meter Statistics Screen

The Traffic Meter Statistics screen reports on the following parameters:

• Tx Frames

• Tx Octets

• Rx Frames

• Rx Octets

• Rate Peak – the peak data rate for the viewed period (see below)

• Rate Average – the average data rate for the viewed period (see below)

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-51

Page 180: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The <Period> field defines the interval for which the Traffic Meter statistics are reported as listed below.

Summary Represents the past 24 hours; reports the additive number of frames/octets, the highest peak encountered for 24 hours, and the average for 24 hours.

Current Reports on the current 15-minute interval.

Interval 1,Interval 2,...,

Interval 96

Reports on Intervals 1-96, which correspond to the periods completed 15 minutes ago, 30 minutes ago,..., 24 hours ago.

SNMP Details ScreenThe unit detects and reports T1 network alarms and provides several options for reporting them, one of which is SNMP traps. When a network alarm occurs, the unit sends a trap message to as many as eight destinations on your network. The unit will report each alarm by transmitting an SNMP “trap” to each non-zero Trap IP address.

The SNMP Details screen (Figure 4.45) lets you configure the SNMP parameters described in the paragraphs below.

Figure 4.45 SNMP Details Screen

Read Community Accepts a character string identifying the group authorized to perform read operations. The default setting is “Public.”

Write Community Accepts a character string identifying the group authorized to perform write operations. The default setting is “Private.”

Trap Community Accepts a character string, which is included in SNMP traps generated by the unit. The default setting is “Public.”

Trap IP Address Accepts the IP address of a network device where alarm reporting traps are to be sent.

4-52 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 181: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Diagnostics ScreenThe Diagnostics screen (Figure 4.46) provides a table for viewing the current settings for the test and maintenance functions performed on the available interfaces. This screen shows an upper-level view of all the interfaces so you can see if any port is under test, and if so, view the results. You may change Diagnostic parameters on the Test Details screen (Figure 4.47), which is accessed by selecting the appropriate interface under the <Description> column. The properties of the Diagnostics table are described in the paragraphs below.

Figure 4.46 Diagnostics Screen

Description Describes the type of interface selected for testing.

Loop Type Describes the type of loop test (if any) performed on the selected interface.

Setting Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT.

Pattern Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a BERT for the selected port.

Length Displays the length of time for which the BERT should run for the selected interface.

State Displays the current BERT state for the selected interface.

Test Details Screens

The Test Details screens let you set some test parameters and view other read-only parameters. These screens are also used to initiate a BERT or Loop Test. The Network Interface Test Details screen is shown in Figure 4.47, and its parameters are described below the figure. The Serial Interface Test Details screen is shown in Figure 4.48, followed by a description of its parameters.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-53

Page 182: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.47 Network Interface Test Details Screen

BERT Table on Network Interface Test Details Screen

The BERT table lets you set the test parameters listed below.

Setting Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT. The available values for this parameter depend on which interface is selected.

Values: Net, Use Service, Idle, Channel 1...24Default: Net

BERT Pattern Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a test for the selected port.

Values: Marks, QRSS, 511, 2047, 215, SpacesDefault: QRSS

NOTICE: The 215 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.

Test Duration Specifies the length of time for which the test should run for the selected port.

Values: 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours, ContinuousDefault: 15 minutes

From this screen, you can also view the following read-only parameters:

Service Index Selects the channels with a service to BERT. (Refer to the Service Table Screen shown on page 4-20.)

Rate Sets the bit rate to BERT for each selected channel. If “Νx64K” is selected, the ones density requirements of the T1 network line must be ensured. If “Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0 channel is maintained.

Values: Nx56K, Nx64KDefault: Nx64K

Pattern Sync Displays the state of pattern sync during a test. If no test is in progress, “No Test” is displayed. If a test is active, but the receiver is not in pattern sync,

4-54 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 183: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

“No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is displayed.

Elapsed Time Displays the time elapsed since a timed test began or, if completed, the total test time.

Bit Errors Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the test began or since error statistics were cleared.

Errored Seconds Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds that have been detected since the test began or since error statistics were last cleared.

%EFS Displays the percentage of time that the test ran error-free. This ratio is derived from the number of error-free seconds divided by the number of seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.

Loop Table on Network Interface Test Details Screen

The Loop table lets you specify the type of Loop test to be performed. The types of tests available for you to choose from depend on the currently selected interface. Loopback diagrams are shown in Appendix A, Figure A.1.

Values: No Test (Loop Down), payload loopback (PLB), line loopback (LLB), maintenance loopback (MLB), Far PLB, and Far LLB

Default: No Test (Loop Down)

Figure 4.48 Serial Interface Test Details Screen

BERT Table on Serial Interface Test Details Screen

The BERT table lets you set the test parameters listed below.

Setting Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT. The available values for this parameter depend on which interface is selected.

Values: Net, DTEDefault: Net

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-55

Page 184: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

BERT Pattern Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a test for the selected port.

Values: Marks, QRSS, 511, 2047, 215, SpacesDefault: QRSS

NOTICE: The 215 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.

Test Duration Specifies the length of time for which the test should run for the selected port.

Values: 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours, ContinuousDefault: 15 minutes

You can also view the following read-only parameters from this screen:

Pattern Sync Displays the state of pattern sync during a test. If no test is in progress, “No Test” is displayed. If a test is active, but the receiver is not in pattern sync, “No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is displayed.

Elapsed Time Displays the time elapsed since a timed test began or, if completed, the total test time.

Bit Errors Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the test began or since error statistics were cleared.

Errored Seconds Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds that have been detected since the test began or since error statistics were last cleared.

%EFS Displays the percentage of time the test ran error-free. This ratio is derived from the number of error free seconds divided by the number of seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.

Loop Table on Serial Interface Test Details Screen

The Loop table lets you specify the type of Loop test to be performed. The types of tests available for you to choose from depend on the currently selected interface. Loopback diagrams are shown in Appendix A, Figure A.1.

Values: No Test, Port Loop, V.54 Loop, Far V.54 LoopDefault: No Test (Loop Down)

The Test Details screens provide the following user-selectable prompts:

Prompt Function

Start BERT Starts the specified BERT.

Stop BERT Stops the currently running BERT.

Error Inject Injects a bit error.

Reset Errors Resets the current error count.

4-56 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 185: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Trap Log ScreenThe Trap Log screen (Figure 4.49) shows a collection of all the traps that have been generated. A trap is a mechanism that permits a device to send an alarm for certain network events to an SNMP management station.

The table shown in this screen lists each trap by its Index number, and displays the type of error captured by the trap (Trap Number) and the date and time that the trap was stored (Time Stamp).

Figure 4.49 Trap Log Screen

Top Talkers ScreenSelecting “Top Talkers” displays the Top Talkers screen (Figure 4.50), which is used to set parameters for and initiate the generation of a list of IP addresses ranked in terms of the number of frames and octets they have transmitted during a specified reporting period. This report allows MIS managers to determine who is generating the most traffic on a WAN based on IP addresses.

Figure 4.50 Top Talkers Screen

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-57

Page 186: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

To generate a Top Talkers report, enter the duration parameters and desired report size in the available fields as described below, and then press the “Enter” key or select the “Start” prompt on the screen.

Duration Establishes the amount of time (in seconds) for which the Top Talkers report will capture IP traffic; typically this value is 900 seconds (15 minutes).

Requested Report Size Establishes how many IP addresses will be reported as the “Top Talkers.”

NOTICE: While you may request any number, the unit is internally limited to a maximum report size of 20.

As soon as you initiate generation of a report by pressing the “Enter” key or selecting the “Start” prompt, the Duration value is copied over to the Time Remaining field. When the specified Duration for the report has elapsed, the resulting report-specific information will be displayed on the right side of the screen. This report comprises elements as defined below.

Report # Displays a unique number used to identify the generated report. This number is generated automatically, is incremented sequentially for each report, and can be used by management stations for automatic polling (via the ipadv2.mib).

Size Displays the actual number of IP addresses identified as Top Talkers in the generated report. The maximum report size is 20.

Start Time Displays the time at which the Top Talkers report was initiated (based on System Up Time).

System Up Time Displays the amount of time that the unit has been operational since it was turned on or last reset.

The Top Talkers table reports in descending order the IP addresses that have generated the most traffic during the requested report’s duration. For each IP address listed, the report displays the number of Rx frames, Rx octets, Tx frames, and Tx octets that have been passed across it. In addition, the Timestamp field indicates the time at which a packet was examined for the specified IP address.

IP Gateway ScreenThe IP Gateway is a feature of the WANsuite 5160/5130 that allows routing of IP packets from one network to another using static routes configuration and/or dynamic routing. The IP Gateway uses Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 1 or RIP 2 or Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing.

RIP 1 and RIP 2 are protocols that allow exchange of routing information between two routers. With that information exchange, a router can build its own routing tables that later can be used for “routing” IP packets.

OSPF is a shortest path first (SPF) or link-state protocol. OSPF is an internal gateway protocol (IGP) that distributes routing information between routers in

4-58 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 187: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

a single autonomous system (AS). OSPF chooses the least cost path as the best path.

While RIP is ideal for small- to medium-sized networks, OSPF is more suitable for complex networks with a large number of routers. OSPF provides equal cost multipath routing where packets to a single destination can be sent via more than one interface simultaneously.

The IP Gateway also supports unnumbered networks. An unnumbered network is a point-to-point connection without an assigned IP address This feature reduces the number of IP addresses required.

Figure 4.51 IP Gateway Screen

RIP Parameters

RIP Enable Globally enables RIP 1, RIP 2, or No RIP. Default is RIP 2.

Values: Disable, Enable RIP1, Enable RIP2Default: Enable RIP2

RIP Trust Neighbors Globally enables the trusted neighbors feature. If there is a list of trusted neighbors in an IP Gateway, only RIP packets coming from those trusted neighbors will be used to build the internal routing table.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

RIP Interval Interval for RIP packet to be sent. Default is 30 seconds.

RIP Domain Value representing the RIP domain. Default is 0.

OSPF Parameters

OSPF Enable OSPF stands for Open Shortest Path First Routing, which is a shortest-path- first (SPF) or link-state protocol. OSPF is an interior gateway protocol that

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-59

Page 188: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

distributes routing information between routers in a single autonomous system. This Protocol is suitable for complex networks with a large number of routers. If a large network is involved, OSPF may be the solution for the user.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

OSPF Router ID This 32-bit number assigned to each router running the OSPF protocol uniquely identifies the router within an Autonomous System. Each router requires a unique router ID. Default is the LAN IP address of the unit.

The IP Gateway screen provides the following prompts that may be selected by pressing the “Enter” key:

Circuit Table Screen

This menu shows the configured circuit. To configure a new circuit, select "Add New."

Figure 4.52 Circuit Table Screen

Prompt Function

RIP Parameters

Static Route Table Displays static and dynamic route information.

Static ARP Table Displays static ARP information.

Trusted Neighbors Displays trusted neighbors information.

OSPF Parameters

Area Table Displays area information.

Virtual Link Table Displays virtual link information.

Circuit Table Provides user access to circuit-related information/operation.

4-60 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 189: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Circuit Details Screen

Access this menu by selecting the appropriate <Index> number from the Circuit Table menu.The screen’s parameters are described in the paragraphs that follow.

Figure 4.53 Circuit Details Screen

Endpoint Endpoint name. By default, the first circuit is always the LAN circuit. All other circuits are associated with Endpoint names as defined in the Endpoint Table. (See Endpoint Table Screen shown on page 4-41).

IP Address IP Address of the circuit.

IP Mask IP mask of the circuit.

Max Transmit Unit Maximum transmit unit this circuit will send at any one time.

Cost Represents the relative time of treatment of an IP packet. This value is used when there are multiple routes to the same destination. When two or more routes are available, the one with the lowest circuit cost is selected. A frame relay circuit should have a higher value than a LAN circuit.

RIP Status Indicates whether or not RIP is enabled on this circuit.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

Multicast Status Indicates whether or not Multicast is enabled on this circuit.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

OSPF Status Indicates whether or not OSPF is enabled on this circuit.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-61

Page 190: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

OSPF Area Represents that area that this circuit is part of.

OSPF LSA Timer Determines how often The Link State Acknowledgment (LSA) packet is sent.

Values: 1−3600Default: 5

OSPF LSU Delay The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State Update (LSU) packet over this circuit interface.

Values: 1−3600Default: 1

OSPF Router Priority This 8-bit unsigned integer ranges from 1 to 255 and assigns priority to one of two routers attached to the same network; without an assigned priority, both routers attempt to become the designated router.

Values: 1−255Default: 1

OSPF Hello Interval The time in seconds between the Hello packets that a router sends on a circuit. This value is also advertised in the router’s Hello packets and must be identical for all routers on the same network. The smaller the Hello Interval, the sooner topological changes are detected (but then more traffic is created).

Values: 1−65535Default: 1

OSPF Dead Interval The number of seconds that a router’s “Hellos” have not been received before its neighbors declare the router down. The value must be the same as the value on the network.

Values: 1−65535Default: 40

OSPF Auth Key When configured, this parameter allows an authentication procedure to be executed on the OSPF header. If the 64-bit (8 character) password does not correspond, the packet is thrown away.

Values: 64 bits (8 characters)Default: 8 spaces (no authentication)

Static Route Table Screen

Under some circumstances, it may not be necessary for a router to learn a route using ordinary means such as RIP or OSPF. It is possible under these circumstances for you to add a route to the route table of a router. The Static Route menus are always associated with a circuit.

4-62 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 191: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.54 Static Route Table Screen

The fields on this screen are described in the table below.

Routes Details Screen

This screen displays the details associated with a specific route.

Figure 4.55 Routes Details Screen

Field Description

Endpoint Endpoint name (or interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the Target IP Address.

Target IP Address Represents the target network that you want this router to reach.

Target IP Mask Mask of the target network.

Next Hop IP address of the next device in the route.

Cost Cost of using that route.

Rte Stat Indicates whether or not a route is enabled or disabled.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-63

Page 192: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Endpoint Endpoint name (or interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the Target IP Address.

Target IP Address Represents the target network that you want this router to reach.

Target IP Mask Mask of the target network.

NOTICE: Setting the target IP address and Target IP Mask to 0.0.0.0 defines THE default route for this unit.

Next Hop IP Address: IP address of the next device in the route.

Cost Cost of using that route.

Route Status Indicates whether this route is enabled or disabled.

Dynamic Route Table Screen

Access this menu by selecting the “Static Route Table” on the IP Gateway menu and then selecting the Dynamic Route Table prompt. This table shows all known routes. Please note that not all parameters are necessarily defined, depending on whether or not the routes were learned dynamically. Primarily, the most useful information is included in "Destination," "If Ndx," and "Mask" columns.

Figure 4.56 Dynamic Route Table Screen

The Dynamic Route Table displays the fields listed below.

Field Description

Destination Network to be reached.

If Ndx Internal TCP/IP stack interface number.

Next Hop IP address used to reach the destination network.

Mask Mask of the destination network.

4-64 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 193: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Static ARP Table ScreenARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is used by the router to dynamically associate a high-level IP address to a low-level physical hardware address. ARP packets are only sent across a single physical network.

There are some cases when an IP-compatible device does not support ARP or ARP is deliberately disabled (for security). Then this is when this menu is useful. Instead of using ARP to dynamically update the router internal MAC <-> IP Address Table, this menu can force an entry into that table. This entry never times out.

At least one circuit must be defined to create a Static ARP Table entry because an ARP entry is always associated with a circuit. The static ARP table is useful when a Host does not respond to an ARP request. Access this menu by selecting “Static ARP Table” from the IP Gateway menu.

Figure 4.57 Static ARP Table Screen

The fields listed below are displayed on the Static ARP Table screen.

ARP Details Screen

Access this screen by selecting the applicable <Index> number on the ARP Table screen.

Field Description

Endpoint Endpoint name (or Interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the defined IP address. Currently, this is always the LAN.

IP Address The IP address of the unit for which you want to define the MAC address.

MAC Address The MAC address of the host to be reached.

ARP Status Displays whether this static ARP is enabled or disabled.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-65

Page 194: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.58 ARP Details Screen

Endpoint Endpoint name (or Interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the defined IP Address. The default is the LAN.

IP Address IP address of the circuit.

Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

MAC Address The MAC address of the Host to be reached.

Values: A 6-byte valueDefault: 00-00-00-00-00-00

ARP Status Displays whether this static ARP is enabled or disabled.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

Trusted Neighbors ScreenThe Trusted Neighbors feature can be used to store RIP information only from a specific router. This allows the router to reject any RIP information coming from non-Trusted Neighbors. Only information coming from Trusted Neighbors is kept by the router. Access this menu by choosing Trusted Neighbors from the IP Gateway menu. This table is useful when the Network Administrator wants to listen to RIP of specific router(s).

4-66 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 195: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.59 Trusted Neighbors Screen

Add New Adds a Trusted Neighbors IP address.

Neighbor Details ScreenAccess this screen (Figure 4.60) by selecting a number under the <Index> column. This screen lists all IP addresses of Trusted Neighbors.

Figure 4.60 Neighbor Details Screen

The Neighbor Details screen provides a “Delete Neighbor” prompt that lets you delete this Trusted Neighbor.

Area Table Screen

An Area allows growth and makes the networks at a site easier to manage. An area is self-contained; knowledge of an area’s topology remains hidden from other areas. Thus, multiple groups within a given site retain the ability to change their internal network topology independently.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-67

Page 196: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.61 Area Table Screen

The fields displayed on the Area Table screen are described below.

Area Details Screen

This screen displays the details associated with a defined Area.

Figure 4.62 Area Details Screen

Field Description

Area ID Displays the ID of the Area (represented by an IP address).

Ena Displays whether the defined area is enabled or disabled.

Auth Type Indicates Area validation.

Stub Displays whether or not the defined area is a Stub Area.

Addr Summary Displays the Address Summary of the defined Area.

Mask Summary Displays the Mask Summary of the defined Area.

Ad Displays whether advertising is enabled or disabled for this Area.

4-68 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 197: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Area ID This parameter has the same format as the IP Address of the Mask Address.

Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

Enable Displays whether or not this Area is enabled.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

Auth Type Indicates type of Authentication.

Values: Simple, NoneDefault: None

Stub An area can be configured as stub when there is a single exit point from the area, or when the choice of exit point need not be made on a per-external-destination basis.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

Address Summary A configured address range specifies what addresses are contained within an area. When summarizing the routes in an area to inform other areas, all routes falling within the configured range are described by a single LSA, thus decreasing the size of the LSA database.

Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

Mask Summary IP Mask of the summary to be added.

Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255Default: 0.0.0.0

Advertise Describes the local state of a router or network. This includes the state of the route’s interfaces and adjacencies. Each link state advertisement is flooded throughout the routing domain. The collected link state advertisements of all routers and networks form the protocol's topological database.

Values: Yes, NoDefault: No

Virtual Link Table Screen

To permit maximum flexibility, OSPF allows the configuration of virtual links to enable the backbone area to appear contiguous despite the physical reality.

In OSPF, the backbone is defined as an Area ID of 0.0.0.0. This backbone cannot be disconnected in any way or some areas of the Autonomous System become unreachable. This is because all inter-area traffic must go through the backbone. In fact, the backbone is responsible of all inter-area routing information distribution.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-69

Page 198: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

It is possible that an area cannot be connected directly to the backbone. In this case a virtual link is used. To establish or maintain the connectivity of the backbone, virtual links can be configured through non-backbone areas. Basically, virtual links are used to connect components that are otherwise not connected to the backbone.

A virtual link is treated by OSPF as a point-to-point unnumbered network joining two area border routers. The virtual link must be configured in both of the area border routers.

A virtual link is defined by the following two parameters:

• The Router ID of the virtual link’s other endpoint

• The non-backbone area the virtual link goes through.

Figure 4.63 Virtual Link Table Screen

The fields displayed on the Virtual Link Table screen are described below.

Virtual Link Details Screen

This screen displays the details associated with the specific Virtual Link.

Field Description

Enable Enables the definition of a virtual link.

Transit Area ID The non-backbone area the virtual link goes through.

Area Border Router ID

The Router ID of the virtual link’s other endpoint.

4-70 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 199: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.64 Virtual Link Details Screen

TCP Server

NOTICE: TCP Server traffic has a higher priority than other types of traffic flowing through the unit. Refer to Normal Tx Queue Size on page 4-30 for more details.

The TCP Server is a general-purpose application that maps arbitrary TCP port numbers to non-TCP/IP devices that have been assigned an endpoint. (See the Endpoint Table Screen on page 4-40.)

TCP Server ScreenThe TCP Server Screen (Figure 4.65) lets you establish TCP connections and map them to physical devices that communicate via a supported interface.

Figure 4.65 TCP Server Screen

Access the TCP Connection Details screen (Figure 4.66) by selecting the appropriate number under the <Ndx> column. The TCP Connection Details

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-71

Page 200: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

screen lists the Index number, the Endpoint name, the TCP Local Port number, and whether or not this entry is enabled.

Figure 4.66 TCP Connection Details Screen

Select the TCP Connection Table prompt on the TCP Server screen to access the screen shown in Figure 4.67. This screen lets you see which addresses and ports are in a “listening” state and which are already established.

Figure 4.67 TCP Connection Table Screen

Select the “TCP Host Access Table” prompt on the TCP Server screen to access a screen (Figure 4.68) where you can specify up to 10 IP addresses that may access the services provided by TCP Server. If no addresses are provided, any host can access the services provided by TCP Server.

4-72 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 201: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.68 TCP Host Access Screen

You can access the Host Access Details (Figure 4.69) for a specific <Ndx> number by selecting the appropriate number under the <Ndx> column.

Figure 4.69 TCP Host Access Details Screen

Network Address Translation (NAT)NAT is a method of connecting multiple computers to the Internet (or any other IP network) using one IP address. This lets users cost-effectively and efficiently connect their networks to the Internet.

Whether on a global or local port, NAT provides translation only upon receipt of a packet, which NAT will translate, not translate, or filter, depending on the user-specified parameters (further described below). If the decision is made to “translate,” the packet will be modified internally, and eventually sent on to the IP Gateway to be processed. If the decision is made not to “translate,” the packet will not be modified in any way. If the decision is made to “filter,” the packet will be discarded without any further action required.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-73

Page 202: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for any changes in NAT configuration parameters to take effect.

NAT Details ScreenThe NAT Details screen (Figure 4.70) lets the user configure the NAT global parameters described below.

Figure 4.70 NAT Details Screen

Enable Enables or disables NAT. Default is “Disable.”

Mode Selects the Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) mode or the Basic NAT mode. In NAPT mode, all hosts on the Global (public) side view all hosts on the Local (private) side as a single internet host (one IP address). In Basic NAT mode, the Global IP address is assigned as a Class C host address (Mask of 255.255.255.0). Each private IP address on the Local side is mapped to a Class C public address on the Global side. In other words, if there are 30 hosts on the private (Local) side, 30 public (Global) addresses are required. The default is NAPT.

Global IP Addr Global IP Address used in NAPT mode. Must be a valid Class C address. Default is LAN IP Address.

Global Mask IP Mask associated with defined Global IP Address. Default is LAN IP Mask.

ICMP Default Addr Default source address used to answer any ICMP request. Default is LAN IP Address. ICMP requests are not transferred from the Global to the Local side. Rather they are answered by the unit itself since Local addresses are private and do not receive unsolicited requests.

Filter Non LocalAddress

Discards any packet with “non corporate” source address. Default is “Enable.”

The screen parameters listed below are related to the NAT Control Block Timer. Note that default values should be in accordance with most NAT

4-74 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 203: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

applications. The timers’ values minimize NAT resources. Generally, when a timer has expired, the resources used are no longer needed. Those resources will then be available for other connection resources.

IP Entry Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when not using TCP, UDP, or ICMP.

Values: 0−65535Default: 120

TCP Connection Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to establish a TCP connection.

Values: 0−65535Default: 300

TCP Closing Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to close a TCP connection.

Values: 0−65535Default: 0

TCP DisconnectedTimer

The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to disconnect from TCP.

Values: 0−65535Default: 120

TCP Sequence DeltaTimer

The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when managing TCP Packet Sequencing.

Values: 0−65535Default: 180

UDP Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources for a UDP port in use.

Values: 0−65535Default: 120

ICMP Timer The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources for any ICMP request.

Values: 0−65535Default: 120

The NAT Details screen provides the following user-activated prompts:

Prompt Function

Static TCP Translation Table Allows static mapping of global TCP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-75

Page 204: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Static TCP Trans Table Screen

The Static TCP Trans Table screen (Figure 4.71) allows static mapping of global TCP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination. The parameters described below enable access to TCP servers on the private/corporate network “behind the NAT.” The parameters may be used only when in NAPT mode.

Figure 4.71 Static TCP Translation Table Screen

Global Port Decimal IP Port exposed to the global Internet. Default is 0.

Server Port Decimal IP Port of the local TCP Server. This port is usually the same as the Global Port. Default is 0.

Server Address IP Address of the local TCP Server. Default is 0.0.0.0.

The “Add New” prompt lets the user add additional addresses.

You can configure or change the above-listed parameters on the Static TCP Trans Details screen (Figure 4.72), which is accessed by selecting the appropriate <Ndx> number on the Static TCP Trans Table screen.

NAT Ports Defines NAT global/Internet and local/corporate ports.

Static UDP Translation Table Allows static mapping of global UDP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination.

Prompt Function

4-76 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 205: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.72 Static TCP Translation Details Screen

NAT Ports Screen

The parameters on the NAT Ports screen (Figure 4.73) define the NAT global/Internet and local/Corporate ports. These parameters are configured in the NAT Ports Details screen shown in Figure 4.74. Access the NAT Ports Details screen by selecting the <Ndx> number of the desired port on the NAT Ports screen.

Figure 4.73 NAT Ports Screen

Enable Enables or disables the NAT port. Default is “Enable.”

Default Translation Forces translation on a specific IP port regardless of the source IP Address. If Default Translation is set to “Enable,” the packet will never be discarded, but will always pass through the translation path. Therefore, any packets with a destination address different from the global/Internet network address will be processed by the IP Gateway, and may be routed to another port. If this parameter is set to “Disable,” no packet with a destination address different from the global/Internet address will be processed. Setting this parameter to

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-77

Page 206: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

“Disable” will override an “Enable” parameter set under “Filter Non Local Address” on the NAT Details menu.

Type Defines whether this port is local or global. Default is LAN global. All others are local.

IP Address IP Address of this port. Default is the value defined in the IP Gateway Circuit Table.

Mask Mask related to the defined IP Address. Default is the value defined in the IP Gateway Circuit Table.

Endpoint The Endpoint name of the circuit associated with the LAN or WAN port. Default is LAN for the first port.

The “Add New” prompt lets the user add additional ports.

Figure 4.74 NAT Port Details Screen

The NAT Port Details screen provides the following user-activated prompts:

The NAT Port Status screen shown below displays for each port the processed packets from specific IP addresses.

Prompt Function

Delete Deletes the specified NAT Port.

Status Displays the NAT Port Status screen (Figure 4.75).

4-78 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 207: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.75 NAT Port Status Screen

IP Address Original IP Address of the host.

NAT IP Address Translated IP Address of the host.

Processed Packets Number of packets processed by NAT for this address.

Static UDP Trans Table Screen

The Static UDP Trans Table screen (Figure 4.76) allows static mapping of global UDP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination. The parameters described below enable access to UDP Servers on the private/corporate network “behind the NAT.” The parameters may be used only when in NAPT mode.

Figure 4.76 Static UDP Translation Table Screen

Global Port Decimal IP Port exposed to the global Internet. Default is 0.

Server Port Decimal IP Port of the local UDP Server. This port is usually the same as the Global Port. Default is 0.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-79

Page 208: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Server Address IP Address of the local UDP Server. Default is 0.0.0.0.

The “Add New” prompt lets the user add additional addresses.

You can configure or change the above-listed parameters on the Static UDP Trans Details screen (Figure 4.77), which is accessed by selecting the appropriate <Ndx> number on the Static UDP Trans Table screen.

Figure 4.77 Static UDP Translation Details Screen

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)DHCP provides a mechanism through which computers using TCP/IP can obtain protocol configuration parameters automatically through the network.

The most important configuration parameter associated with DHCP is the IP address. A computer must initially be assigned a specific IP address that is appropriate to the network to which the computer is attached, and that is not assigned to any other computer on that network. If a computer moves to a new network, it must be assigned a new IP address for that new network. DHCP can be used to manage these assignments automatically.

DHCP has other important configuration parameters also, such as the subnet mask, default router, and Domain Name System (DNS) server. Using DHCP, a network administrator can avoid “hands-on” configuration of individual computers through complex and confusing setup applications. Instead, those computers can obtain all required configuration parameters automatically, without manual intervention, from a centrally managed DHCP server. DHCP is available on the 10/100 Ethernet port only.

NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for any changes in DHCP configuration parameters to take effect.

NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a 60-second timeout will occur.

4-80 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 209: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

DHCP Server Details ScreenThe DHCP Server Details screen (Figure 4.78) lets you configure the parameters described below.

Figure 4.78 DHCP Server Details Screen

Enable Enables or disables the DHCP Server. Default is “Disable.”

Number of Ports Defines the number of DHCP ports to be used. In this version, only “1” is a valid value.

TTL Time to Live for any DHCP packet. Default is 64.

Service Type Type of Service used by the DHCP Server packet. Default is 1.

Lease Time Tells the DHCP client the number of seconds it can retain this IP address. The client should make a new DHCP request within the specified amount of time to ensure the IP address is not given to another PC. Default is 600 seconds.

Primary DNS IP Addr If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this address to resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.

Secondary DNS IPAddr

If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this secondary address to resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.

Domain Name Domain name to be used by all DHCP clients. Default is user’s server.

Router IP Addr IP address that all clients use for Gateway or Router. Default is 0.0.0.0.

Primary WINS IPAddr

If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this address to resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.

Secondary WINS IPAddr

If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this secondary address to resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-81

Page 210: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The DHCP Server Details screen provides the following user-activated prompts:

DHCP Hosts Screen

In some cases, it may be necessary to provide an IP station with a specific DHCP server name, which may be used by the IP station when making a DHCP request. That name is included on the DHCP Hosts screen (Figure 4.79), which identifies the DHCP server sending DHCP packets.

Figure 4.79 DHCP Hosts Screen

Host Name The name of the DHCP Server. Default is none.

Select “Add New” to add a new host name.

NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for the new Server name to become active.

Static Entries Screen

The Static Entries screen (Figure 4.80) lists static IP addresses associated with MAC addresses. This ensures that the same IP address will always be used for a given PC provided its MAC address is known. These parameters are configured on the Static Entries Details screen accessed by selecting a number from the <Ndx> column.

Prompt Function

Host Table Lists Host names (DHCP server identification).

Static Entry Table Creates a list of static IP addresses associated with MAC addresses.

Address List Table Defines the addresses available for DHCP clients.

Address Status Table Displays DHCP Server statistics.

4-82 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 211: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.80 Static Entries Screen

MAC Address MAC Address you want to associate with an IP address.

IP Address IP Address given to the DHCP client if that client has the MAC Address defined on this screen.

Mask Mask associated with the IP Address shown on the screen.

Host Name Name given to the DHCP client.

Select “Add New” to add a static entry.

IP Address List Screen

The IP Address List screen (Figure 4.8) displays the “pool” of addresses available for DHCP clients. These parameters are configured on the IP Address List Details screen accessed by clicking on an <Ndx> number.

Figure 4.81 IP Address List

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-83

Page 212: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

IP Start Starting IP Address of the DHCP client pool.

IP End Ending IP Address of the DHCP client pool.

IP Exclude Start Beginning of “excluded” range.

IP Exclude End End of “excluded” range.

Select “Add New” to add an IP address.

IP Address Status Screen

The IP Address Status screen (Figure 4.82) displays a list of all current DHCP clients.

Figure 4.82 IP Address Status Screen

MAC Address MAC Address of this DHCP client.

IP Address IP Address given to this DHCP client if that client has the MAC Address defined on this screen.

Status Provides IP Address Status.

BridgeA Bridge operates at the physical network layer, connecting two or more networks and forwarding packets between those networks. For example, a Bridge will connect two or more physical Ethernet cable segments and forward Ethernet packets from one segment to the other.

Bridges differ from routers in that bridges forward packets based on physical addresses rather than on the IP Addresses that routers use to forward packets. Bridges will not “blindly” forward packets from one network to others, however. Rather, it learns all local physical addresses and forwards packets based on those learned “tables.” This greatly reduces the number of broadcasted packets, thus saving valuable bandwidth.

4-84 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 213: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The Bridge Details screen shown in Figure 4.83 lets you access and configure the parameters described below.

Figure 4.83 Bridge Details Screen

From this screen, you may view the parameters described below.

Enable Enables or disables Bridging capability.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Disable

Group Multicast MACAddress

MAC Address recognized by the Bridge as the group address for the Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) transfer between bridges.

Values: Any valid Group Multicast MAC AddressDefault: 0180C2000000

Bridge ID Consists of a bridge priority and its own MAC Address.

Values: 1−65535Default: 2

Hello Timer Specifies the BPDU broadcasting interval.

Values: 1−65535 sDefault: 10 s

Max Age Timer Specifies the length of time a bridge will consider the network topology held in memory as valid.

Values: 1−65535 sDefault: 60 s

Forward Delay Specifies the length of time to delay creation of a temporary loop in the network.

Values: 1−65535 sDefault: 5 s

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-85

Page 214: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Filter Ageing Timer Specifies the length of time an entry in the lookup table will be held if no traffic is received from the specified MAC Address.

Values: 1−65535 sDefault: 300 s

The Bridge Details screen provides the following user-activated prompts:

Figure 4.84 Bridge Port Table

The Bridge Port Table screen lets you view the parameters described below the Bridge Port Details screen. Clicking on a number in the <Ndx> column of the Bridge Port Table will bring up the Bridge Port Details screen, which displays, and, in some cases, lets you change, the parameters described below.

Prompt Function

Bridge Port Table Displays the Bridge Port Table screen (Figure 4.84) that lets the user access and configure the Bridge Port Details screen (Figure 4.85).

Bridge Lookup Table Displays the Bridge Lookup Table screen (Figure 4.86) that contains all MAC Addresses learned by the Bridge.

4-86 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 215: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.85 Bridge Port Details

Enable Enables or disables Bridging on this port.

Endpoint Endpoint name.

BPDU Option Shows if BPDU packet will be sent and received on this port.

Filter By MulticastAddr Dest

Filters multicast messages received on this port, which reduces the load on the WAN connection.

Filter By BroadcastAddr Dest

Filters broadcast messages received on this port, which reduces the load on the WAN connection.

Forward IP FramesOnly

Setting this option to “Yes” specifies that only IP frames will be forwarded and all other frames will be filtered.

Priority Value of priority associated with this port. The lower the value, the higher the priority.

Path Cost Value of efficiency of the path to the port. A higher path cost indicates a slower link.

State If Enabled, reflects the state of the port. “Blocking” means there is no data transfer between LANs. “Listening” means the frames received from this port are filtered, but do not modify the Lookup Table. “Learning” means that while the port continues to look at frames without participating in data transfer, the frames received from the port will be used to update the Lookup Table. “Forwarding” means the port participates fully in data transfer and the frames received are used to update the Lookup Table.

Designated Root MAC Address of the designated root of the spanning-tree topology.

Designated Cost Associated Path Cost to the route for this port.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-87

Page 216: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Designated Bridge Designated Bridge MAC Address.

ForwardTransmissions

Number of times this port has changed from any other state to a “Forwarding” state.

Input Frame Number of frames received.

Output Frame Number of frames transmitted.

Input Discards Number of frames discarded.

Figure 4.86 Bridge Lookup Table

Address MAC Address learned and included in the forwarding table.

Port Port where the MAC Address was learned.

Status How the address was included in the forwarding table. The two possibilities include “Self” (the unit’s own MAC address), and “Learned” (the unit-learned MAC address is directly accessible by this port).

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)Use the SMTP Screen (Figure 4.87) to configure the SMTP function of the WANsuite 5160/5130. SMTP is used to forward notification of events to a user-definable list of up to five recipients. The even notification is sent as an e-mail in the following format:

From: [email protected]: Event ReceiverSubject: Even Notification

IP Address: 192.168.60.157System Up Time: 0 days, 01:20:02System Name:System Location:System Contact:

4-88 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 217: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Reporting the following event:OOFS Threshold Exceeded, ifIndex 3, Count 5

The parameters associated with the SMTP Details screen are described below.

Figure 4.87 SMTP Screen

Mail Server IP Address IP address of the mail server to which notifications will be sent.

Domain Name Name of domain where the device resides (i.e., Verilink.com)

Mail From E-mail address of the device (WANsuite). While the device will not be able to retrieve e-mail from a service, the mail needs to have the “From” address filled in.

Recipient 1...5 E-mail addresses of recipients of event notifications (i.e., [email protected] or [email protected]).

EncryptionIf a DLCI encapsulation is set for FRF.17 instead of RFC1490, all data will be encrypted using FRF.17 Mode One formats and protocols. However, the encryption method is Blowfish, rather than the DES specified in FRF.17.

NOTICE: This software-based encryption should not affect performance of the unit in a SCADA environment because the message size is quite small. However, a main site unit encrypting up to 128 DLCIs and operating a number of remote units using encryption will see a degradation in performance as traffic increases.

V T 1 0 0 I n t e r f a c e 4-89

Page 218: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 4.88 Encryption Details Screen

4-90 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 219: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

C H A P T E R

5CHAPTER 5FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE

IntroductionThis chapter describes the menus and options associated with the WANsuite 5160/5130’s front panel LCD interface.

Description of Front PanelThe front panels of the WANsuite 5160 (Figure 5.1) and 5130 are the same except that the 5130 has an LED labeled “Alarm” where, on the 5160, that LED is labeled “#2 Serial.” Both units have four LED status indicators, three user-activated input control buttons, and a 2-line, 16-character LCD screen that provides access to unit configuration, diagnostics, and utilities.

Figure 5.1 WANsuite 5160 Front Panel

Figure 5.2 WANsuite 5130 Front Panel

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-1

Page 220: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The table below describes the WANsuite 5160/5130’s LED indicators.

Indicator Description

NET This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been configured. The indicator lights green when the T1 link is operational and the configured protocol established.The indicator lights red if the T1 link is down and the configured protocol is not established. The indicator lights amber if the T1 link is up and at least one configured protocol is established.

#1 SERIAL INTERFACE or #2 SERIAL INTERFACE (5160) or SERIAL INTERFACE (5130)

DTR Alarm Enabled:

This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been configured.

The indicator lights green when DTR is active and the configured protocol is established.

The indicator lights red when DTR is not active and the configured protocol is not established.

The indicator lights amber when DTR is not active or the configured protocol is not established.

DTR Alarm Disabled:

This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been configured.

The indicator lights green when the configured protocol is established.

The indicator lights red when the configured protocol is not established.

ALARM(5130)

This indicator lights red if an alarm condition exists

The indicator lights amber if a “yellow” alarm condition exists.

POWER This indicator lights green when power is applied to the unit.

The indicator lights amber in test modes (Port looped or BERT active).

5-2 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 221: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

The use of the input control buttons found on all three units is defined in the following table:

LCD Front Panel OperationAfter power is applied and the unit performs a self test, the unit displays the “Idle” screen shown in Figure 5.3. The top line of the display shows the unit ID and the second line shows the revision number of the software the unit is using. Press any one of the front panel buttons to leave the “Idle” screen and access the interface.

PasswordThe unit is factory shipped without a programmed password. When you access this interface for the first time, the password prompt will not appear and the interface proceeds directly to the Main Menu screen as shown in Figure 5.4.

The password screen (Figure 5.5) will appear only after you have established a password. Enter a correct password to advance to the Main Menu.

Button Description

EXIT The EXIT button lets you exit a menu option, which then places the unit in the next higher level in the menu hierarchy. If you are in the process of editing an option and pressing the EXIT button, you will exit that screen without any changes having been saved. If you are in the main menu and press EXIT, you will be logged off the unit.

SCROLL The SCROLL button lets you review the available options for a given level in the menu hierarchy or scroll through possible settings for a parameter. The SCROLL button is also used to set alphanumerical values, where applicable, by scrolling incrementally through digits 0–9 or letters A–Z and a–z.

SELECT The SELECT button lets you select the currently displayed option or value for a given field, and is also used to enter an “edit” mode for parameters that require user-specified input. The SELECT button is also used to confirm certain actions or settings.

WANsuite 5160 Rev. xx.x/xx.x

Figure 5.3 WANsuite 5160/5130 Idle Screens

WANsuite 5130 Rev. xx.x/xx.x

MAIN MENUALARMS

Figure 5.4 Main Menu Screen

ENTER PASSWORD PW: ********

Figure 5.5 Password Screen

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-3

Page 222: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

To enter an established password, press the SCROLL button until the desired character appears (the characters scroll 0–9, A–Z, and a–z for a total of 62 distinct characters), then press the SELECT button to enter that character. Continue selecting the appropriate characters until the last character is entered. Finally, press the EXIT button. A correctly entered password advances the unit to the Main Menu screen. An incorrectly entered password returns an “Idle” screen. If unsuccessful, reenter the password.

NOTICE: Remember that passwords are case-sensitive. When logging on, password must be entered exactly as it was programmed.

Interface ConventionsFigure 5.6 shows a front panel display consisting of a menu title, the menu element, and the information element.

Menu TitleThe menu title shows the general classification for a group of accessible functions.

Menu ElementThere are three types of menu elements, distinguished by the box type shown in the menu diagrams.

• A large, solid box indicates user-selectable menus with lower level menu items.

• A dashed box indicates user-selectable parameters. Press SELECT to execute the displayed configuration.

• A small, solid box indicates either a non-selectable status or a field in which a particular value can be entered.

For example, refer to WANsuite 5160 Alarms Menu Tree on page 5-6. The upper level menus are shown within a large, solid box, which indicates user-selectable menus. The lower level menus are shown within dashed boxes to indicate user-selectable parameters. The smaller, solid boxes under “Net 15 Min Perf” indicate that values can be entered in these fields.

The menu element is a menu or submenu accessible by pressing the SELECT button. When a menu element is selected, it becomes the menu title and the next lower level in the hierarchy becomes the menu element. For example, if the MAIN MENU menu element is NET CONFIG, pressing the SELECT button moves NET CONFIG up to the menu title level and FRAMING moves up to the menu element level with ESF being displayed as the option.

Menu Element

NET CONFIGFRAMING: ESF

Menu Title

Information Element

Figure 5.6 LCD Menu Example Showing Screen Elements

5-4 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 223: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Information ElementThe information element is a user-selectable field allowing changes to the setting. Initially, it is a display-only field. To access the information element, press the SELECT button at the desired menu element. Scroll through the available information element options by pressing the SCROLL button; an arrow (<) will appear to the right of the available options as you scroll through them. Press the SELECT button when the desired option is displayed. Pressing the SELECT button changes the user-selectable information element to the visible parameter (the arrow will disappear after the selection has been made) and immediately returns the unit to the menu element.

When the EXIT button is pressed while accessing a selectable element, any changes to the parameters in the information element are disregarded and the panel display returns to the element menu. Every time the EXIT button is pressed, the cursor returns to the next higher level in the menu hierarchy.

CursorWhen the menu’s information element is a user-selectable function, a cursor (represented by a blinking LCD character box) will appear on the right-most side of the element’s value. This lets you scroll through the options available for that portion of the element. Pressing the SELECT button a second time sets that parameter. The cursor does not appear when status-only elements are displayed.

NOTICE: To return to the previous screen without changing a parameter, press EXIT; do not press SELECT. Pressing EXIT again returns you to the previous screen.

Main MenuThe front panel interface is designed on a hierarchical menu system as shown in Figure 5.7. The WANsuite 5160/5130 lets you choose from the submenu options beginning at the MAIN MENU.

Figure 5.7 Main Menu Tree Structure

Alarms MenuThe ALARMS menu lets you view the current (within the last 15 minutes) and threshold alarm status for the network lines.

Alarms(page 5-5)

MAIN MENU

Maintenance(page 5-9)

Utilities(page 5-22)

Performance(page 5-8)

Configuration(page 5-12)

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-5

Page 224: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 5.8 WANsuite 5160 Alarms Menu Tree

Figure 5.9 WANsuite 5130 Alarms Menu Tree

Network 1 and Network 2 (5160) or Network (5130) Alarm Status MenuSelecting the NET or NET 1 (NET 2) ALARM STATS option displays the Net or Net 1 (Net 2) 15 Min Perf screen. This screen provides the network signal alarm states for the types of alarms described in the following paragraphs.

To the right of each alarm type on the bottom line of the LCD display are two sets of three-digit numbers separated by a slash (e.g., 000/045). The first three digits indicate the number of errors that have occurred during the past 15 minutes. The second three digits indicate the established alarm threshold. An

Net 1Alarm Stats

Alarms

Net 2Alarm Stats Serial 1 Serial 2

Net 1 15 Min Perf

ESSES

LOSSOOFSBPVSCSSRASAISSUAS

Net 2 15 Min Perf

000-899 Yes, No

ESSES

LOSSOOFSBPVSCSSRASAISSUAS

AlarmsReset Timer

AlarmsRst Alrms

DTR Alarm OK

Network Alarm Stats

Alarms

Reset Timer Reset Alarms

Net15 Min Perf

ESSESLOS

OOFSBPVSCSSRASAISSUAS

000-899 Yes, No

Serial

DTR Alarm OK

5-6 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 225: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

asterisk (*) will appear in front of these numbers when the unit is in alarm for that parameter.

ES Errored Seconds − the number of seconds for which at least one bit error has occurred. A default threshold for alarm of 45 counts has been set for this parameter.

SES Severely Errored Seconds − the number of seconds for which bursts of errors have occurred during the last 15 minutes. Often the noise on the T1 link is of an impulsive random nature. The impulse noise tends to cause several bit errors in sequence. The line then may become quiet and error-free for most of the time. This parameter gives a measure of the impulsive error quality of the line. The threshold for SES is set at 5.

LOS Loss of Signal − the number of seconds for which the receiver failed to see received signal strength above its lower operating limit. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 5.

OOFS Out of Frame Seconds − the number of 1-second periods in which a frame sync loss occurred. Often the receiver will be able to bridge bit errors and still maintain frame synchronization. This is true since a frame consists of many bits. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 5.

BPVS Bipolar Violation Seconds − the number of times the signal failed to observe the rules for changing the polarity of the logic “1” transmitted signal. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 0. This means that this alarm is initially turned off.

CSS Controlled Slip Seconds − indicates the number of seconds during which a timing correction was needed due to buffer under-run or overflow. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 5.

RAS Remote Alarm Seconds − the number of seconds the RAI/yellow alarm has been reported from the remote end of the T1 link. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 0. This means that this alarm is initially turned off.

AISS Alarm Indication Signal Seconds − the number of seconds AIS has been received. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 0; this means that this alarm is initially turned off.

UAS Unavailable Seconds − the number of seconds for which data was not available at the T1 port. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 0. This means that this alarm is initially off.

NOTICE: Alarm detection and generation are per the guidelines set forth in ANSI T1M1.3. Other relevant standards include ANSI T1.403-1989 and AT&T PUB 54016

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-7

Page 226: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

DTR AlarmRead-only field that displays the current DTR Alarm status. This register shows “OK” when no alarms are detected, and shows “ALRMD” when the unit alarms a loss of DTR.

Reset TimerThis field is the contiguous number of seconds that an alarm parameter must be clear before the alarm is reset. Applicable values range from 000 through 899. A value of “000” means that the alarm never resets. Press SELECT to change this threshold.

Reset AlarmsThis option clears the alarm counts. To reset the alarms, press the SCROLL button to bring up the “Yes” option, and then press the SELECT button.

Performance MenuThe PERFORMANCE menu displays a history of the network error parameters that are continuously monitored. This register lets you view the 24-hour performance totals from the unit. Only the 5160’s Network 1 Performance menu is shown below in Figure 5.10 because the parameters are the same for the WANsuite 5160 Network 1 and Network 2 menus and also for the Network menu in the WANsuite 5130.

Figure 5.10 Performance Menu Tree

The parameters found on this menu are the same as on the Alarms menu tree, except for the three additional parameters defined below.

Net 1 24-hour Perf

(read-only fields)

RxES

SESLOSSOOFSBPVSCSSRASAISSUAS

CRCESBES

LOFC

Net 1Performance

5-8 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 227: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

CRCES Sets the Cyclic Redundancy Check Errored Seconds (CRCES) threshold. A CRC is a method of confirming the integrity of received data.

BES Sets the Bursty Error Seconds (BES) threshold. A BES is a 1-second period during which at least more than one but fewer than 320 CRC6 errors occurred.

LOFC The Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) represents the number of time a loss of frame is declared. A loss of frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous loss of signal or OOF.

Maintenance MenuThe MAINTENANCE menu is used to perform loop test functions. From this menu, Loop tests can be activated and cleared. The WANsuite 5130 Maintenance Menu Tree has the same submenus as the 5160, but does not have the Network 2 or Serial 2 options.

Figure 5.11 Maintenance Menu Tree

Network Maintenance MenuThe following paragraphs describe the user-selectable and display-only parameters of the 5160’s NET 1 and NET 2 and the 5130’s NET interface maintenance menu.

Maintenance

Network 1

Network 2

Serial 1

Serial 2

Loop Setting Pattern Length Sync Elapsed Bit Errs ES % EFS Cmd

No TestPLBLLBMLB

Far PLBFar LLB

NetIdle

Ch. 1“

Ch. 24

QRSS511

20472^15

SpacesMarks

15 min30 min

1 hr24 hrCont

(read- only field)

(read- only field)

(read- only field)

(read- only field)

(read- only field)

StopReset

Err InjectStart

Loop Setting Pattern Length Sync Elapsed Bit Errs ES % EFS Cmd

No TestPortV.54

Far V.54

NetDTE

QRSS511

20472^15

SpacesMarks

15 min30 min

1 hr24 hrCont

(read- only field)

(read- only field)

(read- only field)

(read- only field)

(read- only field)

StopReset

Err InjectStart

(same as “Network 1”)

(same as “Serial 1”)

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-9

Page 228: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Loop Lets you specify the type of loop test (if any) performed on the selected interface.

Values: No Test, Payload Loopback (PLB), Line Loopback (LLB), Maintenance Loopback (MLB), Far LLB, and Far PLB

Default: No Test

Setting Lets you specify on which channels the BERT will be performed.

Values: Net, Service, Idle, Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel 3...Channel 24 Default: Net

Pattern Lets you specify the pattern to be transmitted during a BERT for the selected port.

Values: QRSS, 511, 2047 2^15, Spaces, MarksDefault: QRSS

NOTICE: The 2^15 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.

Length Lets you specify the length of time that a BERT should run for the selected interface.

Values: 15 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, 24 Hours, ContinuousDefault: 15 Minutes

Sync Display-only field shows the state of pattern sync during a BERT. If no BERT is in progress, “No Test” is displayed. If a BERT is active, but the receiver is not in pattern sync, “No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is displayed.

Elapsed Display-only field shows the amount of time (in seconds) that has elapsed since a BERT began or, if completed, the total test time.

Bit Errors Display-only field shows the number of bit errors detected since the BERT began or since error statistics were last cleared.

ES Display-only field shows the number of asynchronous errored seconds that have been detected since the BERT began or since error statistics were last cleared. This parameter includes bit error seconds and sync loss seconds.

% EFS Display-only field shows what percent of the total test time ran error free. This ratio is derived from the number of error free seconds divided by the number of seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.

Cmd Lets you control basic aspects of the BERT performed, including the injection of errors during test.

Values: Stop, Reset, Error Inject, StartDefault: Stop

5-10 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 229: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Serial Maintenance MenuThe following paragraphs describe the user-selectable and display-only parameters of the 5160’s SERIAL 1 and SERIAL 2 and 5130’s SERIAL interface maintenance menu.

Loop Lets you specify the type of loop test (if any) performed on the selected serial interface.

Values: No Test, Port, V.54, Far.V.54Default: No Test

Setting Lets you specify the direction towards which the BERT pattern is sent.

Values: Net, DTE Default: Net

Pattern Lets you specify the pattern to be transmitted during a BERT for the selected port.

Values: QRSS, 511, 2047, 2^15, Spaces, MarksDefault: QRSS

NOTICE: The 2^15 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.

Length Lets you specify the length of time that the BERT should run for the selected interface.

Values: 15 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, 24 Hours, ContinuousDefault: 15 Minutes

Sync Display-only field shows the state of pattern sync during a BERT. If no BERT is in progress, “No Test” is displayed. If a BERT is active but the receiver is not in pattern sync, “No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is displayed.

Elapsed Display-only field shows the amount of time (in seconds) that has elapsed since a BERT began or, if completed, the total test time.

Bit Errors This display-only field shows the number of bit errors detected since the BERT began or since error statistics were last cleared.

ES Display-only field shows the number of asynchronous errored seconds detected since the BERT began or since error statistics were last cleared. This parameter includes bit error seconds and sync loss seconds.

% EFS Display-only field shows what percent of the total test time ran error free. This ratio is derived from the number of error free seconds divided by the number of seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-11

Page 230: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Cmd Lets you control basic aspects of the BERT performed, including the injection of errors during test.

Values: Stop, Reset, Error Inject, StartDefault: Stop

Configuration MenuThe Configuration menu lets you configure the parameters of the various interfaces.

Figure 5.12 WANsuite 5160 Configuration Menu Tree

Figure 5.13 WANsuite 5130 Configuration Menu Tree

TCP/IP Configuration MenuThe TCP/IP CONFIG menu lets you configure the unit’s IP parameters. Use the SCROLL button to display the desired configuration parameter, and then press the SELECT button to activate the configuration function.

Figure 5.14 TCP/IP Configuration Menu Tree

IP Address This menu lets you assign a unique network address to this unit.

To establish an IP Address, press the SELECT button to activate a blinking cursor over the first digit’s location (an “x”) in the address, indicating the value is selected for change. Press the SCROLL button to incrementally change the selected digit’s value (0–9). When the desired value for a selected portion of the address is displayed, press the SELECT button to set that value

TCP/IP Config

Configuration

Net 2 Config Serial 2 ConfigNet 1 Config Serial 1 Config Supv Config

Configuration

Serial ConfigNet ConfigTCP/IP Config

TCP/IP Config

Subnet Maskxxx.xxx.xxx.xx

IP Addressxxx.xxx.xxx.xx

Gateway Addressxxx.xxx.xxx.xx

DHCP Client

DisEn

Ethernet

DisEn

5-12 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 231: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

and to move to the next value in the address. Pressing the SELECT button while the blinking cursor is on the last digit enters the value and returns to the previous screen. Pressing the EXIT button at any time while entering an IP address aborts the edit.

Subnet Mask This menu lets you define the network portion of the unit’s IP address.

To establish the Subnet Mask (a number used to identify a subnetwork), press the SELECT button to activate a blinking cursor over the first digit’s location (an “x”) in the field, indicating that the value is selected for change. Press the SCROLL button to incrementally change the selected digit’s value (0-9). When the desired value for a selected portion of the field is displayed, press the SELECT button to set that value and to move to the next value in the field. Pressing the SELECT button while the blinking cursor is on the last digit enters the value and returns you to the previous screen. Pressing the EXIT button at any time while entering a Subnet Mask aborts the edit.

Gateway Address This option lets you define the IP address of the default gateway (router) on the LAN side of the unit.

To establish the Gateway Address, press the SELECT button to activate a blinking cursor over the first digit’s location (an “x”) in the address, indicating the value is selected for change. Press the SCROLL button to incrementally change the selected digit’s value (0-9). When the desired value for a selected portion of the address is displayed, press the SELECT button to set that value and to move to the next value in the address. Pressing the SELECT button while the blinking cursor is on the last digit enters the value and returns you to the previous screen. Pressing the EXIT button at any time while entering a Gateway address aborts the edit.

DHCP Client If DHCP Client is enabled at power-up, the unit will request its IP, Mask, and Gateway addresses from a DHCP server located on the LAN side of the unit, and the unit will use these addresses. If the DHCP request is unsuccessful, the unit will use the configured addresses shown on this screen.

NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a 60-second timeout will occur.

Ethernet Enables or disables a remote unit’s Ethernet port.

Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Configuration MenuUse the NET 1 or NET CONFIG menu to set up parameter values for the T1 port labeled as “NET #1” on the WANsuite 5160 or “NET” on the WANsuite 5130 as shown in Figure 5.15.

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-13

Page 232: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 5.15 Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Configuration Menu Tree

The Network 1 or Network interface can have independently selected values for the following parameters:

Mode Selects the network service type.

Values: Long Haul, Short HaulDefault:Long Haul

LBO Sets the transmit Line Build Out (LBO) for the network interface.

Values: 0, −7.5, −15.0, −22.5 dBDefault:0 dB

Framing Selects the framing for the network side of the DSU/CSU.

Values ESF, D4Default:ESF

Coding Sets the network side line coding.

Values: AMI, B8ZSDefault:B8ZS

Timing Sets the timing source to synchronize the unit’s internal timing generators. In all cases, slips are controlled to occur on frame boundaries at the Network and/or DSX-1 ports when timing synchronization is lost. Choices are as follows:

Network 1 (5160) − Int, Net 1, Net 2, Serial 1, Serial 2

Network 2 (5160) − Int, Net 2, Serial 2

Network (5130) − Int, Net, Serial

Definitions of the timing sources are as follows:

Internal – The unit’s internal frequency standard (T1 1.544 Mbps ± 50 bps) is used for all timing.

Net 1Config

Framing Coding TimingLBO

ESFD4 B8ZS

AMIInt

Net 1Net 2

Serial 1Serial 2

0−7.5−15.0−22.5

Zero Suppression

DisEn

PRM

DisEn

Mode

Long-HaulShrt-Haul

Learn DS0 Boot Learn DS0 As Learn DS0 Now

5-14 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 233: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Network 1, Network 2, Network – Timing is derived from the Network port recovered clock.

Serial 1, Serial 2, Serial – Timing is derived from the Serial port recovered clock.

Zero Suppression Determines whether ones density insertion is activated after 15 zeros. This parameter is ignored if the Coding parameter is set to “B8ZS”.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault:Disable

PRM Lets you establish which performance messaging standard will be employed to initiate Performance Report Message (PRM) functions. Setting this field to “Enable” instructs the unit to use ANSI T1.403, which sends a PRM once every second. Setting this field to “Disable” instructs the unit to use AT&T TR54016, which provides performance reporting on request only.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault:Disable

Learn DS0 Boot Determines if the unit will attempt to discover active DS0s (after power-up, Save and Restart). Active DS0s will then be assigned to the first associated network service.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault: Disable

Learned DS0 As Specifies the rate at which each discovered DS0 will be set.

Values: As 56K/64KDefault: As 64K

Learn DS0 Now Learns which DS0s are active and assigns them to the first associated network service. Learned DS0s are based on the idle pattern specified in the Channel Table.

Network 2 Configuration Menu (5160 Only)The NET 2 CONFIG menu is used to set up parameter values for the port labeled as “NET #2” on the WANsuite 5160.

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-15

Page 234: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 5.16 Network 2 Configuration Menu Tree

Mode Selects the network service type.

Values: Long Haul, Short HaulDefault:Long Haul

LBO Sets the transmit Line Build Out (LBO) for the network interface.

Values: 0, −7.5, −15.0, −22.5 dBDefault:0 dB

Level Specifies the DTE DSX-1 interface output level.

Values: 0−110, 111−220, 221−330, 331−440, 441−550, 551−660, >661 ftDefault:0−110 ft

Framing Selects the framing for the network side of the DSU/ CSU.

Values ESF, D4Default:ESF

Coding Sets the network side line coding.

Values: AMI, B8ZSDefault:B8ZS

Timing Sets the timing source to synchronize the unit’s internal timing generators. In all cases, slips are controlled to occur on frame boundaries at the Network ports when timing synchronization is lost. The options are as follows:

Channel Map

IdleThru

T+Sig

Channel 1

Channel 24

IdleThru

T+Sig

Net 2Config

Framing Coding

Timing

LBO

ESFD4

B8ZSAMI

IntNet 2

Serial 2

0−7.5−15.0−22.5

Zero Suppression

DisEn

PRM

DisEn

Long-HaulShrt-Haul

Level

0-110111-220221-330331-440441-550551-660

>661

Mode

Learn DS0 Boot Learn DS0 As Learn DS0 Now

5-16 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 235: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

In Slave mode − timing parameter is ignored in Slave mode

In Network mode − Internal, Network 2, Serial 2

Definitions of the timing sources are as follows:

Internal – The unit’s internal frequency standard (T1 1.544 Mbps ± 50 bps) is used for all timing.

Network 2 – Timing is derived from the Network port recovered clock.

Serial 2 – Timing is derived from the Serial port recovered clock.

Zero Suppression Determines whether ones density insertion is activated after 15 zeros. This parameter is ignored if the Coding parameter is set to “B8ZS”.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault:Disable

PRM Lets you establish which performance messaging standard will be employed to initiate Performance Report Message (PRM) functions. Setting this field to “Enable” instructs the unit to use ANSI T1.403, which sends a PRM once every second. Setting this field to “Disable” instructs the unit to use AT&T TR54016, which provides performance reporting on request only.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault:Disable

Channel Map Menu The Channel Map menu allows channels to be allocated/unallocated to the Net 2 interface. The values for this option are as follows:

• Idle − Channel not allocated

• Thru − Allocated to NET 2

• T+Sig − Allocate and Signaling enabled

There is no default value for this option.

Serial 1 and Serial 2 (5160) or Serial (5130) Configuration MenusThe SERIAL INTERFACE #1 and SERIAL INTERFACE #2 configuration menus on the WANsuite 5160 and the SERIAL INTERFACE on the WANsuite 5130 let you view and make changes to the unit’s serial interface configurations.

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-17

Page 236: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure 5.17 Serial 1 and Serial 2 (5160) or Serial (5130)Configuration Menu Tree

Use the SERIAL 1 CONFIG and SERIAL 2 CONFIG (5160) or the SERIAL CONFIG (5130) to set the configuration parameters defined in the following paragraphs. On the WANsuite 5160, the submenus and options are the same for both SERIAL 1 CONFIG and SERIAL 2 CONFIG menus.

Type This parameter selects the type of interface (based on its electrical signal characteristics) used by the equipment connected to the Serial port.

Values: V.35, RS-232, EIA-530Default:V.35

NOTICE: V.35 requires the use of an optional cable. Refer to Optional Equipment on page A-6 for ordering information.

Mode By default, the Serial port serves as a DCE port in both Packet and TDM modes. However, the Serial port can serve as a DTE port when the unit is in Packet mode.

If the Serial port connects to a DTE device (such as a FRAD or a router), the Mode parameter must be set to “DCE.” If this port connects to a DCE device (such as a DSU/CSU), this parameter must be set to “DTE” (valid only for Packet mode, not TDM).

Values: DCE, DTEDefault:DCE

NOTICE: DTE mode requires the use of an optional DTE cable. Refer to Appendix A,"Specifications," for ordering information.

V.35RS-232EIA-530

Serial 2Configuration

Type Mode DSR DCD CTS RTS RTS Delay Tx Clock

DCEDTE

TrueFalseInt

TrueFalse

Int

TrueFalse

Int

NormalTrue

NormalLong

IntExt

Nx56KNx64K

(N = 1–32)

Channel RateRateInv Clock Bundling

Start Channel

No. of Channels V.54 LL DTR Alrm

Nx64KNx56K

ContAlt

1–24 1–24 DisEn

DisEn

DisEn

DisEn

Serial 1Configuration

5-18 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 237: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

DSR Data Set Ready can be set to “True,” “False,” or “Internal.” The “Internal” option sets DSR “On” if the port is enabled and “Off” if the port is disabled.

Values: True, False, InternalDefault:True

DCD The Data Carrier Detect parameter can be set to “True,” “False,” or “Internal.” If set to “Internal,” DCD is “On” when network carrier is being received from the remote end, and is “Off” when network carrier is not being received from the far end.

Values: True, False, InternalDefault:True

CTS The Clear To Send parameter can be set to “True” or “False.” If this parameter is set to “Internal,” the CTS control lead follows the RTS control lead from the DTE after a delay of a duration established by the RTS Delay parameter.

Values: True, False, InternalDefault:True

RTS The Request To Send parameter determines where the unit reads the RTS signal status from. If set to “Normal,” the unit gets RTS from the Serial pin. If set to “True,” RTS is always perceived as “On.”

Values: Normal, TrueDefault:Normal

RTS Delay The RTS Delay parameter determines how long the unit waits before it changes the level of CTS to match RTS when the CTS parameter is set to “Internal.”

Values: Normal (~30 ms delay), Long (~100 ms delay)Default:Normal

Tx Clock Used to select the clock that the unit uses to sample the data transmitted from the DTE. When set to “Internal,” the data is sampled directly with the transmit data clock that is also supplied to the DTE as Transmit Clock.

Values: Internal, ExternalDefault:Internal

Inv Clock For use in DTE Packet mode to change the clock edge of the transmitted data.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault:Disable

Rate If the port is running in Packet mode, the Rate must be configured to the desired port speed. In TDM mode, the port speed rate will be set by configuring the next four parameters (Start Channel, Number of Channels,

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-19

Page 238: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

5-

20 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Bundling, and Channel Rate). The menu displays the calculated rate in kilobits per second.

Values: Nx56K, Nx64K, where N = 1−32Default:1536 kbps

Channel Rate The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps. If “Νx64K” is selected, the ones density requirements of the T1 network line must be ensured. If “Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0 channel is maintained. The menu displays the calculated rate in kilobits per second.

Values: Nx56K, Nx64KDefault:Nx64K

Bundling Selects whether the DTE channel assignment is made as a “Contiguous” group or as “Alternate” channels. Selecting “Alternate” ensures ones density. Because the unit allows individual channels to be configured for a service, a value of “Arbitrary” will be returned for this parameter if the current channel allocation is not contiguous or Alternate. The “Arbitrary” value can only be supplied by the unit − it cannot be set by the user.

Values: Contiguous, AlternateDefault:Contiguous

NOTICE: Because the “Alternate” Bundling option works by stuffing even channels with ones (1’s) and using odd channels for data, the available bandwidth is actually half of that selected.

Start Channel Selects the starting channel in the 24-channel DS1 bit stream. Starting with the specified channel, the unit automatically assigns the channels that follow.

Values: 1 through 24Default:1

Number of Channels This display-only field shows the number of channels to be passed through to the DTE.

Values: 0 through 24Default:24

V.54 Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to respond to in-band V.54 loop codes. If you select “Disable,” the unit ignores these codes.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault:Disable

LL The Local Loopback parameter can be set to “Enable” or “Disable.” Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to go into Local Loop when the LL pin on the Serial port goes high. The unit exits the loop when the LL pin goes low. If you select “Disable,” the unit ignores the LL pin on the Serial port.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault:Disable

Page 239: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

For more information on pin assignments, refer to Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DTE Mode (Packet Use Only) on page A-7 and Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DCE Mode on page A-9.

DTR Alrm This lets you set the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) alarm control parameters. Choices for DTR Alarm Control are “Enable” and “Disable.” Setting DTR Alarm Control to “Enable” allows the unit to go into alarm on a loss of DTR.

Values: Disable, EnableDefault:Disable

Supervisory Configuration MenuUse the SUPV menu to set up parameter values for the Supervisory port as shown in Figure 5.18 and defined in the paragraphs below.

Figure 5.18 Supervisory Configuration Menu

Speed Changes the Supervisory port speed (in bits per second).

Values: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200Default: 19200

Ch Size Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.

Values: Five, Six, Seven, EightDefault: Eight

Stop Bits Selects the number of bits required to end the character.

Values: 1, 2Default: 1

Parity Sets the parity bit if the port is asynchronous.

Values: None, Odd, EvenDefault: None

DTR Alarm Sets the DTR Alarm.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Disable

Diag Msgs Enables the Supervisory port to send out diagnostic messages upon power-up.

Values: Enable, DisableDefault: Enable

SupvConfig

Speed ParityStop Bits

1200, 2400, 4800,9600,

19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

NoneOddEven

12

DTR Alarm

DisEn

Diag Msgs

DisEn

FiveSix

SevenEight

Ch Size

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-21

Page 240: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

NOTICE: When in SCADA mode, these diagnostic messages disrupt the connected device. Therefore, if using the SCADA mode, set this value to “Disable.”

Utilities MenuThe UTILITIES menu is used to display and change some system operational configurations.

Figure 5.19 Utilities Menu Tree

Maintenance ResetThis screen allows the user to reset the unit to its factory default TDM or Packet configuration for all unit parameter values. Use the “Save” option to write the current configuration to the unit’s non-volatile memory. The “No” option is displayed as a null state only before the user selects and scrolls through Maintenance Reset options − it serves as protection from accidentally resetting the unit.

Values: No, TDM, Save, Packet, Packet 2, Packet 3, Packet 4Default:No

Set PasswordThe Set Password screen lets you establish or change an access password for entry to and control of the front panel interface. The password will consist of selection of up to eight alphanumeric characters. After selecting and exiting password entry, the front panel will require this same selection of coded values to be entered prior to the display moving beyond the “idle” screen.

Select the Set Password option to open the ENTER PASSWORD screen; a blinking cursor appears over the first character or digit to be entered or modified. To establish a unit password, press the SCROLL button to increment the characters and digits (0–9, A–Z, a–z). Pressing the SELECT button accepts the value and moves the cursor to the right. After entering all the characters that define your password, press the SELECT button; the menu will then prompt you to “Verify” the password. Reenter the password exactly as before and again press SELECT. A correctly entered password advances the

Maint Rst

Utilities

Set Password

NoSaveTDMPkt

Pkt 2Pkt 3Pkt 4

Enter Password

LCD E/DSave and RestartStatus

Not NeededRequired

Recommended

5-22 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 241: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

unit to the Main Menu screen. An incorrectly entered password returns you to an “Idle” screen. If unsuccessful, reenter the password.

To disable the password function, select the Set Password option and then, without pressing the SCROLL button, press the SELECT button until the cursor passes through all eight character spaces. The menu will then prompt you to “Verify” the password. Reenter the password exactly as before and again press SELECT.

LCD E/DLets the user enable or disable the LCD interface buttons of the unit.

NOTICE: If you set this parameter to “Disable,” you will immediately lock yourself out of the LCD interface.

Log Out MenuIf the unit is not programmed with a password, you can end the session with the computer and leave the menu system by pressing EXIT while in the Main Menu. If a password has been programmed, the unit prevents an inadvertent log out by requiring you to press SELECT in the Log Out menu.

F r o n t P a n e l L C D I n t e r f a c e 5-23

Page 242: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

5-24 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 243: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

A P P E N D I X

AAPPENDIX ASPECIFICATIONS

Network 1 (or Network) InterfaceLine Rate: 1.544 Mbps (±50 bps)

Line Framing: D4 or ESF

Line Code: AMI or B8ZS

Input Signal: DS1, +1 to −27 dB (ALBO)

Connection: RJ-48C jack, 100 Ω (±5%)

Output Signal: 3.0 V (±10%) base-peak into 100 Ω with protection

Mode: Long-haul, Short-haul

DSX-1 Level: 0-110, 111-220, 221-330, 331-440, 441-550, 551-660, >661 ft

Line Build Out: 0, −7.5, −15, −22.5 dB attenuation

Transient Voltage: 1000 V protection, fused input/output

Jitter Control: per TR 62411 and T1.403

Timing Source: 5160: With “Function” parameter on Network 2 screen in Slave mode, options are Internal, Network 1, Network 2, Serial 1, Serial 2

With “Function” parameter on Network 2 screen in Network mode, options are Internal, Network 1, Serial 1

5130: Internal, Network, Serial

Ones Density: B8ZS, Nx56 bit stuffing, alternate fill; complies with TR 62411

Network 2 Interface (5160 Only)Line Rate: 1.544 Mbps (±50 bps)

Line Framing: D4 or ESF

Line Code: AMI or B8ZS

Input Signal: DSX-1 to −6 dB

Connection: RJ-48C jack, 100 Ω (± 5%)

Output Signal: 3.0 V (±10%) base-peak into 100 Ω with protection

S p e c i f i c a t i o n s A-1

Page 244: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Mode: Long-haul, Short-haul

DSX-1 Level: 0-110, 111-220, 221-330, 331-440, 441-550, 551-660, >661 ft

Line Build Out: 0, −7.5, −15, −22.5 dB attenuation

Transient Voltage: 1000 V protection, fused input/output

Jitter Control: Per TR 62411 and T1.403

Timing Source: With “Function” parameter in Slave mode, timing parameter is ignored

With “Function” parameter in Network mode, options are Internal, Network 2, Serial 2

Ones Density: B8ZS, Nx56 bit stuffing, alternate fill; complies with TR 62411

Serial Interface(s)Connection: DB-25 female

DTE Ports: Selectable RS-530, RS-232, or V.35

Data Rate: Synchronous, nx56 kbps or nx64 kbps (where n = 1–32)

Clocking: Internal, External

IP Gateway

10/100 Ethernet (IP Gateway or Management)Protocols: RIP1, RIP2, OSPF

Connection: 8-pin modular

Network Protocol: TCP/IP based networks

Data Rate: 10/100 Mbps

Compatibility: 10/100Base-T

Management Interfaces

10/100 Ethernet (Management or IP Gateway)Connection: 8-pin modular

Network Protocol: TCP/IP based networks

Data Rate: 10/100 Mbps

Compatibility: 10/100Base-T

Supervisory PortConnection: DB-9 female

Data Rates: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps (default: 19.2 kbps)

DiagnosticsPerformance: 15-minute, 24-hr, and 30-day monitoring (sampled every

second)

A-2 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 245: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Network Loops: Line loopback, payload loopback, or maintenance loopback (see Figures A-1 and A-2)

Fractional Loop: Generates and responds to in-band V.54 loop code

DTE Port Loops: V.54 and Local

BERT: Multiple test patterns toward network or DTE ports with error inject

AlarmsActivation: Programmable thresholds on all interfaces

Reporting: SNMP traps, e-mail notification

Power100-240 VAC: 7 W maximum

18−150 VDC 10 W maximum

MechanicalMounting: Standalone

Dimensions: Width 11.75 inches (29.845 cm)

Height 1.86 inches (4.724 cm)

Depth 8.75 inches (22.225 cm)

Weight: 2.13 pounds (0.97 kg)

EnvironmentalOperating Temp: 32 to 122 °F (0 to 50 °C)

Storage Temp: −4 to 149 °F (−20° to 65 °C)

Humidity: 95% maximum (noncondensing)

S p e c i f i c a t i o n s A-3

Page 246: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Figure A.1 Loopback Diagrams

WANsuite 5160

Internal Logic

NetworkPortT1

NetworkFramer Port

LogicNx64Port

LLB

WANsuite 5160

Internal Logic

NetworkPortT1

NetworkFramer Port

LogicNx64Port

PLB

WANsuite 5160

Internal Logic

NetworkPortT1

NetworkFramer Port

LogicNx64Port

MLB

AIS

WANsuite 5160

Internal Logic

NetworkPortT1

NetworkFramer Port

LogicNx64Port

Port Loop

A-4 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 247: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Frame Relay Statistics Collected in 96 15-minute Intervals

Per Port Tx/Rx frames

Tx/Rx octets

Tx/Rx Mgmt frames

Tx/Rx Mgmt octets

Rx frames with FECN

Rx frames with BECN

Rx invalid frames

Tx/Rx status inquiry frames

Tx/Rx status response frames

Rx invalid LMI frames

Frame delivery ratio

Data delivery ratio

Peak/average throughput

Per DLCI Tx/Rx frames

Tx/Rx octets

Rx frames with FECN

Rx frames with BECN

Rx frames with DE bit set

Tx excess CIR

Tx excess Be

Tx/Rx mgmt frames

Tx/Rx mgmt octets

Peak/average throughput

Peak/average round-trip delay

Round-trip delay time-outs

UAS (unavailable seconds)

PPP Statistics Collected in 96 15-minute Intervals

Per Port Tx/Rx frames

Tx/Rx octets

Tx/Rx mgmt frames

Tx/Rx mgmt octets

Rx invalid frames

Peak/average throughput

Industry ListingsFCC Compliance: Part 15 Class A, Subpart B, Part 68

U.S. Safety: UL 1950 3rd edition

S p e c i f i c a t i o n s A-5

Page 248: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Canadian Safety: CSA C22.2 No. 950-95

Industry Canada: CS-03, Issue 8Standards

TR62411: December 1990

TR54016: September 1989

ANSI T1.403: 1995

TR54019A: April 1988

Ethernet: ISO/IEC 8802-3

Internet: RFC1907RFC1573RFC2863RFC2493RFC2115RFC2495RFC2011RFC2012RFC2013RFC2096RFC2571ds8200tc.mibds8200v2.mibipadv2.mibipstart.mibrouter.mibhdsl2.mib|RFC1490

Ordering InformationEach WANsuite 5160/5130 unit ships with the following standard equipment:

Optional EquipmentThe following optional equipment is available for use with the WANsuite 5160/5130:

Description

T1 Network Cable (RJ-48−RJ-48)

Power Supply

Cord for Power Supply

Serial (SUPV) Cable (DB-9 male to DB-9 female)

Verilink Documentation CD

Description

Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25–DB-25, M/M, pin/pin) (EIA530/RS232), 6-ft

Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25–Winchester 34-pin (V.35) M/M, pin/pin), 5-ft

Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25–Winchester 34-pin (V.35) M/M, pin/pin), 10-ft

Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25–V.35, M/F, pin/pin), 5-ft

A-6 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 249: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

For further ordering information, contact Technical Support (page xii).

Connector Pin AssignmentsThe Serial Interface is a standard DB-25 jack.

Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DTE Mode (Packet Use Only)

Serial (DTE) Cable (DB-25–DB25, M/M, crossed), 6-ft

Serial (DTE) Cable (DB-25–V.35, M/M, crossed), 5-ft

Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25−Cisco DB60), 10-ft

Rack Mount, 19-in., for Single Stand-alone Unit

Rack Mount, 23-in., for Single Stand-alone Unit

Description

Function Abbrev. Direction

Pin #

DB-25* RS-232 V.35 EIA-530

Frame Ground FG n/a 1 1 A 1

Transmit Data TD Output 3 2 P 2

Receive Data RD Input 2 3 R 3

Request to Send RTS Output 5 4 C 4

Clear to Send CTS Input 4 5 D 5

Data Set Ready DSR Input 20 6 E 6

Signal Ground SG n/a 7 7 B 7

Data Carrier Detect DCD Input 8 8 F 8

Balanced Receiver Clock (B)RC Input 12 X 9

Balanced Data Carrier Detect (B)DCD Input 10 10

Balanced External Transmitter Clock (B)ETC

Balanced Transmitter Clock (B)TC Input 11 AA 12

Balanced Clear to Send (B)CTS Input 19 13

Balanced Transmit Data (B)TD Output 16 S 14

Transmitter Clock TC Input 24 15 Y 15

Balanced Receive Data (B)RD Input 14 T 16

Receiver Clock RC Input 15 17 V 17

Local Loopback Loop 3 Output 18 18 J 18

Balanced Request to Send (B)RTS Output 13 19

Data Terminal Ready DTR Output 6 20 H 20

(Not used) n/a 21 21 21

Balanced Data Set Ready (B)DSR Input 23 22

Balanced Data Terminal Ready (B)DTR Output 22 23

S p e c i f i c a t i o n s A-7

Page 250: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

*This refers to the DB-25 Serial interface connector on the back of the unit.

External Transmitter Clock ETC

(Not used) n/a 25 25 25

Function Abbrev. Direction

Pin #

DB-25* RS-232 V.35 EIA-530

A-8 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 251: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DCE Mode

*This refers to the DB-25 Serial interface connector on the back of the unit.

Ethernet Connection Pin Assignments

The 10/100 ETHERNET interface is an 8-pin modular jack that complies with standard twisted-pair, 10Base-T requirements.

Function Abbrev. Direction

Pin #

DB-25* RS-232 V.35 EIA-530

Frame Ground FG n/a 1 1 A 1

Transmit Data TD Input 2 2 P 2

Receive Data RD Output 3 3 R 3

Request to Send RTS Input 4 4 C 4

Clear to Send CTS Output 5 5 D 5

Data Set Ready DSR Output 6 6 E 6

Signal Ground SG n/a 7 7 B 7

Data Carrier Detect DCD Output 8 8 F 8

Balanced Receiver Clock (B)RC Output 9 X 9

Balanced Data Carrier Detect (B)DCD Output 10 10

Balanced External Transmitter Clock (B)ETC Input 11 W 11

Balanced Transmitter Clock (B)TC Output 12 AA 12

Balanced Clear to Send (B)CTS Output 13 13

Balanced Transmit Data (B)TD Input 14 S 14

Transmitter Clock TC Output 15 15 Y 15

Balanced Receive Data (B)RD Output 16 T 16

Receiver Clock RC Output 17 17 V 17

Local Loopback Loop 3 Input 18 18 J 18

Balanced Request to Send (B)RTS Input 19 19

Data Terminal Ready DTR Input 20 20 H 20

(not used) n/a 21 21 21

Balanced Data Set Ready (B)DSR Output 22 22

Balanced Data Terminal Ready (B)DTR Input 23 23

External Transmitter Clock ETC Input 24 24 U 24

(Not Used) n/a 25 25 25

Pin Ethernet Interface

1 Data Out (+)

2 Data Out (-)

3 Data In (+)

6 Data In (-)

S p e c i f i c a t i o n s A-9

Page 252: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Interface Pin Assignments

The NET 1 physical interface is a standard RJ-48C, 8-pin modular jack. The following table displays the pinout assignments.

Network 2 (5160 Only) Interface Pin Assignments

The NET 2 physical interface is a standard RJ-48C, 8-pin modular jack. The following table displays the pinout assignments.

Supervisory Port Pin Assignments

The SUPERVISORY PORT interface is a standard DB-9, 9-pin modular jack. The following table displays the pinout assignments.

Pin T1 NET Interface

1 Data In

2 Data In

3, 6 Not used

4 Data Out

5 Data Out

7, 8 Chassis Ground

Pin T1 NET Interface

1 Data Out

2 Data Out

3, 6 Not used

4 Data In

5 Data In

7, 8 Chassis Ground

Pin DCE Mode DTE Mode

1 DCD out LL out

2 Rx Data out Tx Data out

3 Tx Data in Rx Data in

4 DTR in DSR in

5 Signal Ground Signal Ground

6 DSR out DTR out

7 RTS in CTS in

8 CTS out RTS out

9 No connect No connect

A-10 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 253: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

A P P E N D I X

BAPPENDIX BSNMP AGENT

IntroductionThis chapter provides specific information for configuring and using the SNMP agent within the WANsuite 5160/5130.

The WANsuite 5160/5130 incorporates an Ethernet card that provides connectivity for LAN-based management stations. The embedded TCP/IP Protocol Stack allows remote access from both private networks and the Internet.

SNMP Configuration ParametersTo access the SNMP agent, you must have an SNMP management application, such as HP’s OpenView or Sun’s NetManager. Access to the agent is controlled by three community strings, read-access, write-access, and trap-access (the community string sent with an SNMP trap). Configuration of these community strings within the WANsuite 5160/5130 is accomplished via the HTTP (web browser) interface. Please refer to Chapter 3, Web Server Interface, for instructions on how this is performed.

The defaults for these strings are “public” for read-access, “private” for write-access, and “public” for trap-access. Ensure that your SNMP management application is configured for whatever access strings you use.

SNMP MIBsThe WANsuite 5160/5130 supports the following industry-standard MIB (management information base) files:

• rfc1907.mib − SNMPv2 entities (initial revision published as RFC 1450)

• rfc1573.mib − defines the IANAifType textual convention, and thus the enumerated values of the ifType object defined in MIB-II’s ifTable

S N M P A g e n t B-1

Page 254: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

• rfc2863.mib − describes generic objects for network interface sub-layers (This MIB is an updated version of MIB-II's ifTable, and incorporates the extensions defined in RFC 1229.)

• rfc2493.mib − provides textual conventions to be used by systems supporting 15-minute based performance history counts

• rfc2115.mib − describes the use of a Frame Relay interface by a DTE

• rfc2495.mib − describes DS1, E1, DS2 and E2 interfaces objects

• rfc2011.mib − for managing IP and ICMP implementations, but excluding their management of IP routes

• rfc2012.mib − for managing TCP implementations

• rfc2013.mib − for managing UDP implementations

• rfc2096.mib − for the display of CIDR multipath IP routes

• rfc2571.mib − the SNMP Management Architecture MIB

The WANsuite 5160/5130 support the following Enterprise-specific MIBs:

• ds8200tc.mib − textual conventions used by DS8200 MIB

• ds8200v2.mib − provides T1 configuration and statistics information

• ipadv2.mib − provides Frame Relay, PPP, and Service Aware configuration and statistics

• ipstart.mib − MIB module for synchronous PPP Monitor

• router.mib − provides configuration of OSPF router

• hdsl2.mib − MIB module for HDSL

• ipaddhcp.mib − ΜΙΒ module for DHCP

• ipadnat.mib − MIB module for NAT

These MIB files may be found on the Verilink Documentation CD included with the unit.

SNMP Trap ConfigurationThe WANsuite 5160/5130 supports up to eight IP destinations for SNMP traps. These may be configured either through the Web interface or through an SNMP management application. For configuration of these destinations through an SNMP management application, use a MIB browser to access the table trapdest within ipadv2.mib and set the IP addresses of the host computer running the management application(s). Entering an IP address of 0.0.0.0 will disable the entry.

The following traps are currently defined in the SNMP MIBs supported by WANsuite. VarBinds heading lists additional information that is sent in the SNMP trap message to provide details about the event.

B-2 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 255: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Generic TrapsTrap No. Description VarBinds

coldStart snmpTraps 1 A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered.

warmStart snmpTraps 2 A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered.

linkDown snmpTraps 3 A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity, acting in an agent role, has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the down state from some other state (but not from the notPresent state). This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus.

ifIndex,

ifAdminStatus,

ifOperStatus

linkUp snmpTraps 4 A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity, acting in an agent role, has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state (but not into the notPresent state). This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus.

ifIndex,

ifAdminStatus,

ifOperStatus

authenticationFalure snmpTraps 5 An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated. While all implementations of the SNMPv2 must be capable of generating this trap, the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object indicates whether this trap will be generated.

S N M P A g e n t B-3

Page 256: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Standard TrapsTrap No. Description VarBinds

dsx1LineStatusChange ds1Traps 0 1 A dsx1LineStatusChange trap is sent when the value of an instance dsx1LineStatus changes. It can be utilized by an NMS to trigger polls. When the line status change results from a higher level line status change (i.e. ds3), then no traps for the ds1 are sent.

dsx1LineStatus, dsx1LineStatusLastChange

frDLCIStatusChange frEnterprise 1 This trap indicates that the indicated Virtual Circuit has changed state. It has either been created or invalidated, or has toggled between the active and inactive states. If, however, the reason for the state change is due to the DLCMI going down, per-DLCI traps should not be generated

IfrCircuitIfIndex,

FrCircuitDlci,

FrCircuitState

B-4 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 257: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

ua

in

no

oli

Soon-To-Be-Standard Traps

The HDSL2 MIB is on the verge of becoming an RFC.

hdsl2ShdslTraps OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= hdsl2ShdslLineMib 2

hdsl2ShdslTrapsPrefix OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= hdsl2ShdslTraps 0

Trap No. Description VarBinds

hdsl2ShdslLoopAttenCrossingTrap

1 This trap indicates that the loop attenuation threshold (as per the hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshLoopAttenuation value) has been reached/exceeded for the HDSL2/SHDSL segment endpoint identified by the ifIndex, hdsl2ShdslInvIndex, hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrAtn,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshLoopAttention

hdsl2ShdslSNRMarginCrossingTrap

2 This trap indicates that the SNR margin threshold (as per the hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshSNRMargin value) has been reached/exceeded for the HDSL2/SHDSL segment endpoint identified by the ifIndex, hdsl2ShdslInvIndex, hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrSnrMgn,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshSNRMarg

hdsl2ShdslPerfESThreshTrap 3 This trap indicates that the errored seconds threshold (as per the hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshES value) has been reached/ exceeded for the HDSL2/SHDSL segment endpoint identified by the ifIndex, hdsl2ShdslInvIndex, hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinES,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshES

hdsl2ShdslPerfSESThreshTrap 4 This trap indicates that the severely errored seconds threshold (as per the hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshSES value) has been reached/exceeded for the HDSL2/SHDSL Segment Endpoint identified by the ifIndex, hdsl2ShdslInvIndex, hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinSES,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshSES

hdsl2ShdslPerfCRCanomaliesThreshTrap

5 This trap indicates that CRC anomalies threshold (as per the hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshCRCanomolies value) has been reached/exceeded for the HDSL2/SHDSL Segment Endpoint identified by the ifIndex, hdsl2ShdslInvIndex, hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinCRCamolies,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshCRCanomes

S N M P A g e n t B-5

Page 258: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

S,

hdsl2ShdslPerfLOSWSThreshTrap

6 This trap indicates that the LOSW seconds threshold (as per the hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshLOSWS value) has been reached/exceeded for the HDSL2/SHDSL Segment Endpoint identified by the ifIndex, hdsl2ShdslInvIndex, hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinLOSW

hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshLOSWS

hdsl2ShdslPerfUASThreshTrap 7 This trap indicates that unavailable seconds threshold (as per the hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshUAS value) has been reached/exceeded for the HDSL2/SHDSL Segment Endpoint identified by the ifIndex, hdsl2ShdslInvIndex, hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinUAS

hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshUAS

hdsl2ShdslSpanInvalidNumRepeaters

8 This trap indicates that a mismatch has been detected between the number of repeater/regenerator units configured for a HDSL2/SHDSL line via the hdsl2ShdslSpanConfNumRepeaters object and the actual number of repeater/regenerator units discovered via the EOC.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslSpanConfNumRepeaters

hdsl2ShdslLoopbackFailure 9 This trap indicates that an endpoint maintenance loopback command failed for an HDSL2/SHDSL segment.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslMaintLoopbackConfig

hdsl2ShdslpowerBackoff 10 This trap indicates that the bit setting for powerBackoff in the hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object for this endpoint has changed.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair

hdsl2ShdsldeviceFault 11 This trap indicates that the bit setting for deviceFault in the hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object for this endpoint has changed.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair

hdsl2ShdsldcContinuityFault 12 This trap indicates that the bit setting for dcContinuityFault in the hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object for this endpoint has changed.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair

hdsl2ShdslconfigInitFailure 13 This trap indicates that the bit setting for configInitFailure in the hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object for this endpoint has changed.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair

hdsl2ShdslprotocolInitFailure 14 This trap indicates that the bit setting for protocolInitFailure in the hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object for this endpoint has changed.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair

B-6 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 259: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

hdsl2ShdslnoNeighborPresent 15 This trap indicates that the bit setting for noNeighborPresent in the hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object for this endpoint has changed.

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,

hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair

hdsl2ShdsllocalPowerLoss 16 This trap indicates impending unit failure due to loss of local power (last gasp).

ifIndex,

hdsl2ShdslInvIndex

S N M P A g e n t B-7

Page 260: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Enterprise-Specific Traps

ipadTrapsPrefix

Trap No. Description VarBinds

ipadFrPortRxInvalidFramesExceeded 25000 This trap is sent out when an ipad frame relay port receive invalid frames alarm threshold has been exceeded.

ipadFrPortRxInvAlmAlarm

ipadFrPortRxThroughputExceeded 25001 This trap is sent out when an ipad frame relay port receive throughput threshold has been exceeded.

ipadFrPortRxAlmAlarm

ipadFrPortTxThroughputExceeded 25002 This trap is sent out when an ipad frame relay port transmit throughput threshold has been exceeded.

ipadFrPortTxAlmAlarm

ipadDLCItxCIRexceeded 25003 This trap is sent out when the Tx over CIR threshold has been exceeded. This threshold is the number of frames in excess of CIR.

ipadDLCItxExCIRAlarm

ipadDLCItxBEexceeded 25004 This trap is sent out when the Tx over Be threshold has been exceeded. This threshold is the number of frames in excess of Be.

ipadDLCItxExBeAlarm

ipadDLCIRxCongestionExceeded 25005 This trap is sent out when the Rx congestion threshold has been exceeded. This threshold is the number of frames received with BECN/FECN.

ipadDLCIrxCongAlarm

ipadUserTxExceeded 25006 This trap is sent out when the Tx throughput threshold in bits per second has been exceeded. This threshold represents the number of bits for the user-selected protocol.

ipadUserTxAlmAlarm

ipadDlciRxBECNinCIRAlarm 25007 This trap is sent out when a frame with BECN set has been received within CIR.

ipadDLCIrxBECNinCIR

IpadDlciUASExceeded 25008 This trap is sent out when the UAS (unavailable seconds) Threshold for the DLCI has been exceeded.

ipadDLCIUASAlarm

IpadserialDteDTRAlarmExists 25009 This trap is sent out when a DTR Loss alarm is declared.

serialDteDTRAlarmStatus

ipadt1e1ESAlarmDeclared 25010 This trap is sent out when an Errored Seconds alarm is declared.

t1e1ESCount

ipadt1e1SESAlarmDeclared 25011 This trap is sent out when a Severely Errored Seconds alarm is declared.

t1e1SESCount

B-8 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 261: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

ipadt1e1LOSSAlarmDeclared 25012 This trap is sent out when a Loss of Signal Seconds alarm is declared.

t1e1LOSSCount

ipadt1e1UASAlarmDeclared 25013 This trap is sent out when an Unavailable Seconds alarm is declared.

t1e1UASCount

ipadt1e1CSSAlarmDeclared 25014 This trap is sent out when a Controlled Slip Seconds alarm is declared.

t1e1CSSCount

ipadt1e1BPVSAlarmDeclared 25015 This trap is sent out when a Bipolar Violation Seconds alarm is declared.

t1e1BPVSCount

ipadt1e1OOFSAlarmDeclared 25016 This trap is sent out when an Out of Frame Seconds alarm is declared.

t1e1OOFSCount

ipadt1e1AISAlarmExists 25017 This trap is sent out when an Alarm Indication Signal alarm is declared.

t1e1AISCount

ipadt1e1RASAlarmExists 25018 This trap is sent out when a Remote Alarm Signal alarm is declared.

t1e1RASCount

ipadDLCIremoteSOSAlarm 25019 This trap is sent when the remote unit for a DLCI senses and reports an SOS condition.

ipadDLCIremoteEquipActive

ipadDdsLOSSAlarmDeclared 25020 This trap is sent out when a Loss of Signal Seconds alarm is declared.

ddsNetLOSCount

ipadDdsOOFSAlarmDeclared 25021 This trap is sent out when an Out of Frame Seconds alarm is declared.

ddsNetOOFCount

ipadDdsOOSSAlarmDeclared 25022 This trap is sent out when an Out of Service Seconds alarm is declared.

ddsNetOOSCount

ipadDdsFDLSAlarmDeclared 25023 This trap is sent out when a FDL error Seconds alarm is declared.

ddsNetFDLCount

ipadDdsBPVSAlarmDeclared 25024 This trap is sent out when a Bipolar Violation Seconds alarm is declared.

ddsNetBPVCount

ipadDS0HighAlarmDeclared 25025 This trap is sent out when a high utilization alarm is declared.

ipadDS0ConfigHighUtilCount

ipadDS0LowAlarmDeclared 25026 This trap is sent out when a low utilization alarm is declared.

ipadDS0ConfigLowUtilAlarm

ipadHDLCRxHighAlarmDeclared 25027 This trap is sent out when a high Rx utilization alarm is declared.

ipadHDLCConfigRxHighUtilCount

ipadHDLCRxLowAlarmDeclared 25028 This trap is sent out when a low Rx utilization alarm is declared.

ipadHDLCConfigRxLowUtilAlarm

S N M P A g e n t B-9

Page 262: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Generic MIB Loading InstructionsThe MIBs were written using the standard ASN.1 notation. Any standard SNMP manager should be able to compile the MIBs. Although the exact procedure for loading MIBs may vary from one platform to another, the following basic steps are the same.

1 The SNMP manager has a directory for MIBs. Copy the files ds8200tc.mib, ds8200v2.mib, ipadv2.mib, ipstart.mib, router.mib, and hdsl2.mib into this directory. The MIBs use a DOS format; therefore, a DOS2UNIX command may have to be used for UNIX workstations (typical directories are snmp_mibs for HP’s OpenView, bin for Sun’s NetManager, and mibfiles for Castle Rock Computing’s SNMPc).

2 Start the SNMP manager if it is not already running. Select one of the menu selections (or selection subheadings) that contains the SNMP MIB operations (this is Options subheading for HP OpenView and Config subheading for SNMPc).

3 Choose the option for LOADING or COMPILING MIBs. You must specify which MIBs to load.

4 Once the manager has successfully loaded the MIBs, you are ready to manage the Verilink product. If you have any questions please call Verilink Product Support.

ipadHDLCTxHighAlarmDeclared 25029 This trap is sent out when a high Tx utilization alarm is declared.

ipadHDLCConfigTxHighUtilCount

IpadHDLCTxLowAlarmDeclared 25030 This trap is sent out when a low Tx utilization alarm is declared.

ipadHDLCConfigTxLowUtilAlarm

IpadPPPStartAuthFailureTrap 25050 ipadPPPStartAuthFailureCount

B-10 W A N s u i t e 5 1 6 0 / 5 1 3 0

Page 263: WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual - Verilink · viii WANsuite 5160/5130 Frame Relay Statistics Screen .....4-31

Five-Year Hardware Limited Warranty

I. Limited Warranty. Subject to the limitations and disclaimers set forth in this Hardware Limited Warranty, Verilink warrants to the original pur-chaser (“Buyer”) that the Verilink equipment and component parts (“Goods”) purchased by Buyer shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of five years from the date of shipment of the Goods to Buyer (“Limited Warranty”). Verilink’s sole obligation and Buyer’s sole remedy under this Limited Warranty shall be to repair or replace any Verilink Goods that Verilink determines to be so defective. Any claim by Buyer under this Limited Warranty must be presented to Verilink in writing within five years and fifteen (15) days of the date of shipment of the Goods to Buyer, as evidenced by Verilink’s packing slip or similar shipment documentation from a Verilink authorized reseller. Any replacement Goods may be new or reconditioned. Verilink reserves the right to substitute equivalent Goods for defective Goods, in its sole discretion. As long as Verilink either so repairs or replaces the Goods, this Limited Warranty will not be found to have failed its essential purpose. If the defect has been caused by accident, misuse or abnormal operating conditions (including lightning dam-age) occurring after delivery to Buyer, repairs and/or replacement will be made at Buyer’s expense. In such event, an estimate of cost will be submitted to Buyer before repair work is started. The Limited Warranty will continue to apply to replaced or repaired Goods for whichever is longer: the 90-day period after the shipment of such Goods to Buyer or the remainder of the original Limited Warranty period.

II. EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR OTHER REPRESENTATION. THE GOODS ARE SOLD BY VERILINK “AS IS” WITH-OUT ANY WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE OF ANY KIND OTHER THAN THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE, WHICH IS MADE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, AND VERILINK HEREBY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGE-MENT, AND ALL OTHER IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE PART OF VERILINK. VERILINK DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE BUYER'S USE OF THE GOODS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, SECURE, OR ERROR-FREE. Buyer agrees that no oral or written repre-sentation, advice, advertisement or other statement by Verilink, its reseller, agent, employee, or representative constitutes any warranty, guaran-tee or modification of the foregoing disclaimer and Limited Warranty, and Buyer acknowledges that no person, including resellers, agents, employees, or representatives of Verilink, is authorized to assume for Verilink any other liability on its behalf except as set forth in this para-graph.

III. LIMITATION ON LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL VERILINK, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, DATA LOSS, DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT, OR THE LIKE), REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED ON BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR OTHER LEGAL THEORY, EVEN IF VERILINK OR ITS AGENT WAS ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL VERILINK’S LIABILITY TO BUYER OR ANY SUCCESSOR TO BUYER EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE APPLICABLE GOODS.

IV. LIMITED WARRANTY CONDITIONS. The Limited Warranty shall be void (i) with respect to any Goods that have been repaired or altered outside Verilink’s factory, unless Verilink specifically authorized such repairs or alterations; (ii) in the event parts not made or recommended by Verilink are used by Buyer in the Goods; or (iii) if the Goods are used by Buyer other than in the manner intended by Verilink or other than in conformance with operating instructions and specifications provided by Verilink.

V. MODIFICATIONS BY VERILINK. Minor deviations from specifications that do not materially affect performance of the Goods covered hereby, as mutually agreed upon by Verilink and Buyer, shall not be deemed to constitute a breach of the Limited Warranty. Verilink also reserves the right to discontinue Goods and change specifications for Goods without notice, provided such changes do not adversely affect the performance of the Goods manufactured by Verilink or do not reduce performance below any applicable contract specifications between Ver-ilink and the Buyer. Verilink also reserves the right to make product improvements without incurring any obligations or liability to make the same changes in Goods previously manufactured or purchased. Non-payment of any invoice rendered within the stated payment terms automat-ically suspends the application of, but not the running of, the Limited Warranty for the duration of the non-payment.

VI. AMENDMENT OF WARRANTY TERMS. These terms and conditions of this Hardware Limited Warranty may be revised by Verilink from time to time in its sole discretion. The terms and conditions in effect at the time of purchase will apply to such Goods.

VII. RETURN OF GOODS. If for any reason the Buyer must return a Verilink product, it must be returned to the factory, shipping prepaid, and pack-aged to the best commercial standard for electronic equipment. Verilink will pay shipping charges for delivery on return. The Buyer is responsi-ble for mode and cost of shipment to Verilink. The Buyer must have a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number marked on the shipping package. Products sent to Verilink without RMA numbers will be returned to the sender, unopened, at the sender’s expense. A product sent directly to Verilink for repair must first be assigned an RMA number. The Buyer may obtain an RMA number by calling the Verilink Customer Service Center at 1.800.926.0085, extension 2282 or 2322. When calling Verilink for an RMA, the Buyer should have the following informa-tion available:

• Model number and serial number for each unit

• Reason for return and symptoms of problem

• Purchase order number to cover charges for out-of-warranty items

• Name and phone number of person to contact if Verilink has questions about the unit(s).

A return address will be provided at the time the RMA number is issued. The standard delivery method for return shipments is Standard Ground for domestic returns and International Economy for international returns (unless otherwise specified).

VIII. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Alabama, U.S.A., without reference to its conflicts of law provi-sions. The provisions of the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.